Samsung Electronics Co 708SC PCS GSM/ EDGE Phone with Bluetooth User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	742584
Application ID	0G9g74VUMhgaghya8I/Ekg==
Document Description	Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	228.84kB (2860464 bits)
Date Submitted	2006-12-28 00:00:00
Date Available	2007-06-26 00:00:00
Creation Date	2006-12-22 11:54:54
Producing Software	Adobe Acrobat 6.0
Document Lastmod	2006-12-22 12:36:40
Document Title	Users Manual
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2

Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the SoftBank 708SC.
Note
●Read this guide thoroughly before
using 708SC to ensure proper usage.
･Unauthorized copying of any part of this
guide is prohibited.
●After reading this guide, keep it for
later reference.
･Contents are subject to change without
prior notice.
●Should you lose or damage this guide,
contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
･Not all functions and services described in
this user guide are available in Japan.
●Accessible services may be limited by
contract conditions or service area.
･Steps have been taken to ensure the
accuracy of descriptions in this guide. If
you find inaccurate or missing
information, contact Customer Service
( P.25-25).
708SC is compatible with both 3G and
GSM network technologies.
･If there are any missing/misplaced pages
in this manual, SoftBank will replace it.
Accessories
Make sure the following accessories are included in the package with handset. These accessories are also sold
separately.
For details on accessories or optional items, contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
Battery
AC Charger
Utility Software
(CD-ROM)
Stereo Earphone USB Cable
Microphone
Microphone Cable
Contents
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
About This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
General Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
SAR Certification Information. . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
1 Getting Started
USIM Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
General Information & Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Inserting & Removing USIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
USIM PINs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Handset Parts & Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Display Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Sub Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Battery & Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Time Zone Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Changing Home Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
708SC Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Switch Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Security Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Phone Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Center Access Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Network Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
2 Basic Handset Operations
1-10
1-12
1-14
1-16
Initiating a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Receiving a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Reject Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Answer Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Activating & Canceling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Ringing Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Before Using Battery or Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting & Removing Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Car Charger (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
ii
Sound Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Checking Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engaged Call Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Earpiece Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engaged Call Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Viewing Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Calling from Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Deleting Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Call Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Call Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Data Counter, Call Costs, & Call Times . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Edit Cost Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Display Call Cost during a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
International Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Changing Network Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Calling from Outside Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
3 Manner Profile
Minding Mobile Manners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Manner Related Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Manner Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Changing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Offline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4 Entering Text
Text Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Text Entry Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Changing Text Entry Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Key Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Hiragana/Kanji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Katakana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Alphanumerics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Symbols, Pictograms, & Emoticons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Line Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Quoting Saved Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Hangul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Copy/Cut, Paste, & Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Prediction On/Off (Japanese Only). . . . . . . . . 4-14
iii
Learning On/Off (Japanese Only) . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
User Dictionary (Japanese Only) . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
My Phonebook Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Saving to User Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Before Using Video Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Initiating a Video Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Receiving a Video Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Engaged Video Call Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
SMS Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
5 Phonebook
6 Video Call
Saving to Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Engaged Video Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Phonebook Entry Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Adding Entry Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Saving from Call Log Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Video Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Category Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
New Category (USIM Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Edit Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Add Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Using Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Calling from Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Phonebook Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Editing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy to USIM/Copy to Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-15
Sending Your Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Selecting a Substitute Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Retry Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Voice Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
7 Mobile Camera
Before Using Mobile Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Mobile Camera Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
708SC Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Using Display as Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Capturing a Still Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Capturing Still Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Capturing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Video Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
iv
Capturing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Mobile Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Viewing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Viewing Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Viewing Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Editing Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Editing Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Create Flash® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Attaching Images to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Dialing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Greeting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
9 Sound Settings
Changing Profile Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
10 Media Player
Before Using Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Playing Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
8 Display Settings
Standby Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Operator Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Menu Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backlight Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Sub LCD Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-7
Backlight Brightness & Duration. . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Adjusting Display Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Playing Melodies Using a Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Changing Music Player Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Repeat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Tone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Audio Skin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Visualization Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Playing Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Player Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Repeat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Tone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
11 Managing Files(Data Folder)
Data Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Default Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Saved Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Opening Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Using File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Viewing Graphics/Animation with the SVG-T/Flash®
Viewer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Sorting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Using Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Sound File as Ringtone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Video File as Ringtone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Flash® file as Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a vFile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Folder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-10
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-13
Managing Files/Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Create Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a File Name/Folder Name . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving a File/Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Files/Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a File/Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
11-15
11-15
11-15
11-16
11-17
Deleting a Content Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19
12 External Connections
External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Before Using Bluetooth® Communications . . . . . . .12-2
Sending & Receiving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Connecting Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
Changing Bluetooth® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10
USB Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Connecting to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
Connecting to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
13 Security
Change Phone Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Changing PIN/PIN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Resetting PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
USIM Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Handset Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Phone Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Password Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Privacy Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Activate Secret Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Mobile Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Rejecting Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
Reject Withheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Reject Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Black List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Restoring Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Clear Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
14 Tools
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Wake-up Alarm/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Auto Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Displaying Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Saving New Entries to Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Viewing Saved Calendar Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Editing Calendar Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Deleting Calendar Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Calendar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Voice Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Voice Recorder Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Recording Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Playing Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Changing Voice Recorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Viewing World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Selecting Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Using Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Converting Currencies or Units . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Converting Currencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20
Converting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21
Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Interpreter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
15 Advanced Functions
Calling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Auto Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
International Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
Earphone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Handling Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Anykey Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Acoustic Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Active Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Side Key Silence/Reject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Side Key Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Simple Search Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
vii
Idle Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
Memory Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Show My Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-13
Adding 186 or 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-14
16 Optional Services
Optional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2
Call Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-3
Activating Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Cancel All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Check Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-5
Activating Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canceling Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-5
16-6
16-6
16-6
16-7
Call Waiting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-8
Activating or Canceling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Receiving a Second Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Conference Call* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-9
New Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Engaged Conference Call Operations . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Call Barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-11
Restrict Outgoing/Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Cancel All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
viii
Changing Network Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-13
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
17 Receiving & Sending Messages
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Checking for New Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Retrieving Complete Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-4
Using Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-5
Creating Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-7
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-8
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11
Sending a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12
Changing the Style of Message Field . . . . . . . . . . .17-13
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-14
Attaching/Inserting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
Attaching/Inserting a File from Data Folder, etc. into
Message Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-15
Creating & Inserting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
Saving Created Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20
Saving Attachments to Data Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . .18-14
Save to Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Save as a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Managing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18 Messaging Folders
Viewing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-2
Message Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Message Window Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Replying to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-7
Forwarding a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-8
Sending from Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-8
Sending from Unsent Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .18-9
Deleting a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-9
Deleting Specified Message(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Designating & Deleting a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Deleting All Messages from a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Linked Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-11
Saving to Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Saving as a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Initiating a Call, Sending a Message, or Accessing the
Web
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Using an Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-13
Viewing an Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Create Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-15
Edit Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-15
Security ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-15
Moving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-16
Delete Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-16
From Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Saving to Phonebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-16
Sorting Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-17
Move to Phone/Move to USIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-18
Saving an S! Mail Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-19
Message List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-20
19 Server Mail
Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Acquire Mail List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-2
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-2
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-3
Remote Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
20 Other Message Settings
Customizing Handset Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
S! Mail Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
ix
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-4
SMS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-5
3D Pictogram Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-5
Reply with text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-6
21 Mobile Internet
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-2
Getting Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-3
Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Enter URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Page Window Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-4
Using Linked Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
22 Mobile Internet Files
Using Image Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-2
Saving Images to Data Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Using Sound Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-4
Playing Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Saving Sound Files to Data Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Using Video Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-6
Playing a Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-6
Saving Videos to Data Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-6
Streaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Saving Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
Saving a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-8
Opening a Saved Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-8
Change Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-8
Deleting a Saved Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-9
Saving Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
Saving an Address as a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-9
Opening a Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-10
Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-10
Deleting a Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-11
History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-12
Search Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
Copy Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
Page Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-14
Send URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-14
Server Certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-14
Returning to Default Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-15
Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-15
Information Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-15
Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-4
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-5
23 Other Web Settings
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-2
Cookie Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating/Deactivating Java Script. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacture Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browser Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-2
23-3
23-3
23-3
23-3
23-4
Refresh Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-4
Empty Cache/Empty Cookies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
24 S! Appli
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Network S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Downloading S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
Starting S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-3
Exit, Pause, & Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-3
Exiting or Pausing S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Restarting a Paused S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
mPet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5
Selecting Pet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-5
mPet Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-7
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-9
Comic Surfing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
Browsing Electronic Comic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-11
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12
S! Appli Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-13
Application Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-13
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-14
S! Appli Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-14
Reset S! Appli Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-14
25 Appendix
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Symbols & Pictograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
Managing S! Appli. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-4
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-12
Pictograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-14
Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
xi
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-17
Warranty & After Sales Service. . . . . . . . . . .25-24
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-25
xii
About This Guide
In this guide, 708SC refers to SoftBank 708SC.
Multi Selector operations are indicated as shown
Instructions are described using mainly default
below.
settings. When settings are changed, screen shots or
handset responses may differ from those depicted in
this guide.
Softkeys
Operation options appear at the bottom of Display.
Press the corresponding Softkey to execute assigned
Screen Shots and 708SC Illustrations
functions.
Screen shots appearing in this guide are for reference
only and may differ from actual displays. Product
illustrations may vary from actual products.
Press w
to Save
保存 選択
再生
Press c
to Select
Press o
to Play
Confirmations/Warning Messages
Messages not described in this guide may appear;
read all confirmations and warning messages
carefully.
Symbols
In this guide, symbols represent 708SC keys; see
"Handset Parts & Functions" ( P.1-6). Softkey and
Softkey Operations
Press
Assigned Function
Softkey
xiii
Highlighting
Multi Selector Operations
Use Multi Selector to select menu items, move
cursor, and scroll, etc. In this guide, Multi Selector
In this guide, "to highlight" means to move cursor to
an item.
operations are indicated as shown below.
Menu Operations
Basic Multi Selector Operations
Menu/Options operations are simplified with arrows.
Main Menu
APress
and select Settings →
Display settings → Wallpaper
Highlight an item and press c (Select)
j : Press u or d
For details, see "708SC Menus" ( P.1-20).
s : Press l or r
Options
a : Press u, d, l, or r
ASelect Options → Send → Via
bluetooth
Press o (Options) to open Options
Highlight an item and press c (Select)
xiv
Safety Precautions
• Read these safety precautions before using handset.
• Observe all precautions to avoid injury to yourself and others, or damage to
property.
• SoftBank is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.
xv
Before Using Handset
● Symbols
Make sure you thoroughly understand these symbols before reading on. Symbols and their meanings are
described below:
Danger
Warning
Great risk of death or serious injury from improper use
Caution
Risk of injury or damage to property from improper use
Risk of death or serious injury from improper use
Prohibited Actions
Compulsory Actions
Attention Required
xvi
Danger
Handset, Battery, & Charger
Battery
Use only specified battery and
Charger ( P.i).
If battery fluid gets into your eyes,
do not rub them. Rinse with clean
water and consult a doctor
immediately.
Using non-specified equipment may cause
malfunctions, electric shock or fire due to battery
leakage, overheating, or bursting.
Do not short-circuit Charger Port.
Keep metal objects away from the Charger
Port. Keep handset away from jewelry. Battery may
leak, overheat, burst, or ignite causing injury. Use a
case to carry handset.
Eyes may be severely damaged.
Prevent injury from battery
leakage, breakage, or fire.
Do not:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heat or dispose of battery in a fire.
Disassemble, modify, or break battery.
Damage or solder on to battery.
Use a damaged or deformed battery.
Use a non-specified charger.
Force battery into handset.
xvii
• Charge or place battery near fire, heat sources or
expose it to extreme heat ( P.i).
• Use battery for other equipments.
Warning
Handset, Battery, & Charger
Do not insert foreign objects into
handset.
Do not place metal or flammable objects in handset
or Charger. This may cause fire or electric shock.
Keep handset away from liquidfilled containers.
Keep handset and Charger away from chemicals/
liquids. Fire or electric shock may result.
Avoid sources of fire.
Keep handset out of the reach of children.
To prevent fire or explosion, do not use
Keep handset out of rain or
extreme humidity.
handset in the presence of gas or fine particles (Coal,
Fire or electric shock may occur.
Keep handset and Charger away
from microwave ovens.
dust, metal, etc.).
Battery or handset may leak, burst, overheat, or
ignite.
xviii
Do not disassemble or modify
handset.
Do not subject handset to shocks.
• Do not open the housing of handset or Charger; it
may cause electric shock or injury. Contact the
SoftBank Customer Center, Customer Assistance
for repairs.
• Do not modify handset or Charger. Fire or electric
shock may result.
cause malfunction or injury. Should handset break,
Subjecting handset or Charger to shocks may
remove battery and contact the SoftBank Customer
Center, Customer Assistance. Discontinue handset
use. Fire or electric shock may occur.
If an abnormality occurs:
If water or foreign matter gets
inside handset:
Should there be any unusual sound, smoke,
Discontinue handset use to prevent fire or electric
electric shock. Turn handset power off, remove
shock. Turn handset power off, remove battery,
battery, unplug the Charger, and contact the
unplug Charger and contact the SoftBank Customer
SoftBank Customer Center, Customer Assistance.
or odor, discontinue handset use to avoid fire or
Center, Customer Assistance.
xix
Handset
Using wireless devices aboard aircraft may cause
electronic malfunctions or endanger aircraft
Preventing accidents
• For safety, never use handset while driving.
Pull over beforehand. Mobile phone use while
driving is prohibited by the revised Road Traffic
Law (Effective 1 November 2004).
• Do not use headphones while driving or riding a
bicycle. Accidents may result.
• Do not turn the volume up so high that ambient
sounds cannot be heard, especially when walking
in or around traffic to avoid accidents.
operation.
Adjust vibration and Ringtone
settings:
Select settings carefully if you have a heart condition
or wear a pacemaker/defibrillator.
During thunderstorms, turn power
off; find cover.
Do not swing handset by the
handstrap.
There is a risk of a lightning strike or electric shock.
Injury or breakage may result.
Do not use the phone with wet
hands.
Turn handset power off before
boarding aircraft.
Doing so may lead to electric shock or damage to
xx
708SC.
Charger
Use only the specified voltage.
Do not touch the cooling blades
with wet hands.
• Non-specified voltages may cause fire or
electric shock.
• AC Charger: AC 100V-240V Input
SoftBank is not liable for problems caused by
charging handset abroad.
• In-Car Charger: DC 100V-240V Input
Electric shock may occur.
Do not use commercially available
transformers.
Do not bend, twist, pull, or set
objects on the cord. Do not put
heavy objects on the cords or heat
or pull the cords.
Use of the AC Charger with commercially available
transformers may cause fire, electric shock or
Do not use multiple cords in one
outlet.
Excess heat or fire may occurs.
damage.
Fire or electric shock may result.
Do not use In-Car Charger inside
vehicles with a positive earth.
Fire may result. Use In-Car Charger only inside
vehicles with a negative earth.
Do not short-circuit Charger Port.
Keep the metal away from Port. Overheating,
fire, or electric shock may result.
xxi
Do not use AC/In-Car Charger if
the cord is damaged.
Fire or electric shock may be caused. Contact the
SoftBank Customer Assistance to replace the cord.
Be sure to secure In-Car Charger.
Battery
If battery does not charge properly,
stop charging.
Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.
Avoid injury or accidents.
If there is leakage or abnormal
odor, avoid fire sources.
During thunderstorms:
It may catch fire or burst.
Unplug the Charger to avoid damage, fire, or
If there is abnormal odor, excessive
heat, discoloration, or distortion,
remove battery from handset.
electric shock.
Keep the Charger out of the reach
of children.
Electric shock or injury may occur.
xxii
It may leak, overheat, or explode.
Handset Use & Electronic Medical
Equipment
This section is based on "Guidelines on the Use of
Radio Communications Equipment such as Cellular
Telephones and Safeguards for Electronic Medical
Turn handset power off in crowded
places such as trains. People with
implanted pacemakers/
defibrillators may be near.
Equipment" (Electromagnetic Compatibility
Implanted pacemakers/defibrillators may
Conference, April 1997) and "Report of
malfunction due to radio waves.
Investigation of the Effects of Radio Waves on
Medical Equipment, etc." (Association of Radio
Industries and Businesses, March 2001).
People with implanted pacemakers/
defibrillators should keep handset
more than 22 cm away.
Implanted pacemakers/defibrillators may
malfunction due to radio waves.
Observe these rules inside medical
facilities:
• Do not take handset into operating rooms or
Intensive or Coronary Care Units.
• Keep handset off in hospitals.
• Keep handset off in hospital lobbies. Electronic
equipment may be near.
• Obey rules regarding mobile phone use in medical
facilities.
Consult the manufacturer of other
electronic medical equipment
about radio wave effects.
xxiii
Caution
Handset, Battery, & Charger
Handset Care
• Place 708SC on stable surfaces to avoid
malfunction or injury.
• Keep 708SC away from oily smoke or steam. Fire
or accidents may result.
• Cold air from air conditioners may condense,
resulting in leakage, or burnout.
• Keep 708SC away from direct sunlight (Inside
vehicles, etc.) or heat sources. Distortion,
discoloration, or fire may occur. Battery shape may
be affected.
• Keep 708SC out of extremely cold places to avoid
malfunction or accidents.
• Keep 708SC away from fire sources to avoid
malfunction or accidents.
Usage Environment
xxiv
• Excessive dust may prevent heat release and cause
burnout or fire.
• Avoid using 708SC on the beach. Sand may cause
malfunction or accidents.
• Keep 708SC away from credit cards, phone cards,
etc. to avoid data loss.
Handset
Avoid leaving 708SC in extreme
heat (Inside vehicles, etc.).
Handset may heat up and lead to burns.
Volume settings
Keep handset volume moderate.
Excessive volume may cause damage to your
hearing.
Headphones
Parts
• Do not unplug by pulling the cord; may
damage the cord.
• Keep the plug clean to avoid noise or malfunction.
Battery Cover
Side keys
Inside vehicles:
Rotate Camera
Camera Ornament
Handset use may cause other electronic
Hinge Cap
equipment to malfunction.
Materials &
Finishing
PC/UV coating
Mixture material/
UV coating
PC/UV coating
PC/UV coating
Zinc Alloy/
Nickel coating
Charger
Should skin irritation occur,
discontinue handset use and
consult a doctor.
Charger & In-Car Charger
Skin irritation, rashes, or itchiness may result
depending on your physical condition.
Parts
Housing
Keypad
Charger & External Device Port
Cover
Materials &
Finishing
PC/UV coating
Mixture material
Mixture material/
UV coating
• Grasp the plug (not the cord) to disconnect
Charger. Otherwise, fire or electric shock
may result.
• Keep the cord away from heaters. Exposed wire
may cause fire or electric shock.
• Stop use if the plug is hot or improperly
connected. Fire or electric shock may
result.
• Keep In-Car Charger socket clean. If might
overheat and cause injury.
xxv
Use only the specified fuse
A 1A fuse is specified for In-Car Charger. An
improper fuse may cause damage or fire.
Always charge 708SC in a wellventilated area.
Avoid covering/wrapping Charger; may cause
damage or fire.
Do not use In-Car Charger when
engine is off.
Start engine before use; may weaken car battery.
Disconnect AC/In-Car Charger
during long periods of disuse.
Be sure to unplug AC/In-Car Charger after use.
Handset Maintenance
xxvi
When cleaning, disconnect AC/In-Car Charger to
prevent shock or injury.
Installing In-Car Charger
Properly position the cable for safe driving to
If battery fluid makes contact with
skin or clothes:
avoid injury or accidents.
Rinse with clean water immediately.
Battery
Do not dispose of exhausted
batteries with ordinary refuse.
Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
They may sustain injuries. And when using, do not
let them remove battery from handset.
Do not leave battery in direct
sunlight or inside vehicles.
Tape over battery terminals before disposal, or bring
them to a SoftBank shop. Follow local regulations
regarding battery disposal.
Do not throw or abuse battery.
Battery may overheat, burst, or ignite.
be reduced.
Charge battery within a range of
5°C - 40°C.
Do not expose battery to liquids.
Battery may leak/overheat and performance may
Overheating or fire may occur and performance may
Performance may deteriorate.
deteriorate.
xxvii
If a child is using handset, explain
all these instructions and supervise
handset’s usage.
If there is any abnormal odor or
excessive heat, stop using battery
and call the SoftBank Customer Center,
Customer Assistance.
Do not leave battery uncharged.
Charge at least once every six
months.
xxviii
General Notes
General Use
• SoftBank is not liable for any damages
resulting from accidental loss/alteration of
any data on handset. Please keep separate
records of Phonebook entries, etc.
• Handset transmissions may be disrupted
inside buildings, tunnels, or underground,
or when moving into/out of such places.
• Use handset without disturbing others.
• Handsets are radios as stipulated by the
Radio Law. Under the Radio Law,
handsets must be submitted for inspection
upon request.
• Handset use near landlines, TVs or radios
may cause interference.
• Beware of eavesdropping.
Because this service is completely digital,
the possibility of signal interception is
greatly reduced. However, some
transmissions may be overheard.
Eavesdropping
Deliberate/accidental interception of
communications constitutes
eavesdropping.
Inside Vehicles
• Never use handset while driving.
• Do not park illegally to use handset.
• Handset use may affect a vehicle's
electronic equipment.
Aboard Aircraft
Never use handset aboard aircraft (Keep the power
off).
Handset use may impair aircraft operation.
xxix
Function Restrictions
• After changing phone models or canceling
708SC contract, following functions
become unavailable:
f Camera
f Media Player
f S! Appli
• If 708SC is left unused, above functions
may become unavailable.
Handset Care
• If handset is left with no battery or an
exhausted one, data may be altered/lost.
SoftBank is not liable for any resulting
damages.
• Use handset between 5°
C - 40°
C.
• Avoid extreme temperatures/direct
sunlight.
xxx
• Exposing the lens to direct sunlight may
damage the color filter and affect image
color.
• Do not drop or subject handset to shocks.
• Clean handset with a dry, soft cloth. Using
alcohol, thinner, etc. may damage it.
• Do not expose handset to rain, snow, or
high humidity.
• Never disassemble or modify handset.
• Avoid scratching Display.
• When closing handset, keep straps, etc.
outside to avoid damaging Display.
• When using headphones, moderate the
volume to avoid sound bleed.
• Handset is not water-proof. Avoid
exposure to liquids and high humidity.
fKeep handset away from precipitation.
fCold air from air conditioning, etc. may
condense causing corrosion.
fAvoid placing handset in damp places
(Restrooms, bath/shower rooms, etc.).
fOn the beach, keep handset away from
water and direct sunlight.
fPerspiration may get inside handset
causing malfunction.
• Heavy objects or excessive pressure
should be avoided. This may cause
malfunction or injury.
fDo not sit down with handset in a back
pocket.
fDo not place heavy objects on handset
in a bag.
• Insert only specified devices into
Headphone Port. Malfunction or damage
may result.
• Always turn power off before removing
battery. If battery is removed while saving
data or sending mail, data may be lost,
changed or destroyed.
Copyrights
Copyright laws protect sounds, images, computer
programs, databases, other materials for copyright
holders. Duplicated material is limited to private use
only.
Use of materials beyond this limit or without
permission of copyright holders may constitute
copyright infringement, and be subject to criminal
punishment. Comply with copyright laws when using
images captured with handset camera.
The software contained in 708SC is copyrighted
material; copyright, moral right, and other related
rights are protected by copyright laws. Do not copy,
modify, alter, disassemble, decompile, or reverseengineer the software, and do not separate it from
hardware in whole or part.
xxxi
Trademarks
• Licensed by QUALCOMM
Incorporated under one or more of the
following United States Patents and/or
their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109
5,504,773 5,101,501 5,506,865
5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054
5,535,239 5,267,261 5,544,196
5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420
5,416,797 5,659,569 5,710,784
5,778,338
• S! Appli and Mail Art are trademarks
or registered trademarks of
SOFTBANK MOBILE Corp.
• "SOFTBANK," SOFTBANK's
equivalent in Japanese, and the
xxxii
SOFTBANK logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of SOFTBANK
CORP. in Japan and in other countries.
• Yahoo! and the "Yahoo!" or "Y!" logos
are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Yahoo! Inc.
• This product contains ACCESS Co.,
Ltd.’s NetFront Internet browser
software. NetFront is a trademark or
registered trademark of ACCESS Co.,
Ltd. in Japan and in other
countries.
• Part of the software in this product
incorporates a module developed by
the Independent JPEG Group.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED
UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
("MPEG-4 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii)
DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY
MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT
RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL
USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
• Contains Macromedia® Flash® Flash
LiteTM technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
• Copyright© 1995-2005 Adobe Systems
Incorporated. All rights reserved.
• Macromedia, Flash, Macromedia
Flash, and Macromedia Flash Lite are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and other countries.
• JBlendTM is incorporated in this
product. JBlendTM is a JavaTM execution
environment developed by Aplix
Corporation for implementing
xxxiii
advanced performance and fast
operation on small-memory systems.
• Powered by JBlendTM
Technology.
JBlend and JBlend logos are
registered trademarks of Aplix
Corporation in Japan and other
countries.
• Powered by JBlendTM, ©1997-2006
Aplix Corporation.
All rights reserved.
• JBlend and all JBlend-based
trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Aplix
Corporation in Japan and other
countries.
xxxiv
• Chaku-Uta® and Chaku-Uta Full® are
registered trade marks of Sony Music
Entertainment Corp.
• Java and all Java-based
trademarks and logos are
trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
in the United States and other
countries.
• Bluetooth is a trademark of
the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Samsung
Electronics is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
Bluetooth®
In the frequency band of the Bluetooth®
functions of 708SC, Industrial, scientific
or medical equipments such as
microwave ovens or in-house radio
stations such as the ones used in
production lines or by amateur radio
stations (Referred to as "other radio
stations" hereafter) are used. In order to
prevent radio interference with other
radio equipments, follow the points
listed below in using handset.
1.Before using Bluetooth® functions,
confirm there are no "other radio
stations" operating near you.
xxxv
2.In case there is a radio interference
with "other radio stations," move to
some other place or stop the
Bluetooth® functions (Stop emitting
the radio waves) immediately.
3.If you have any questions or problems
with Bluetooth® emissions, contact
SoftBank as listed below:
Contact: SoftBank Customer Center
From a SoftBank handset, dial 157 (toll free) for
General Information. See "Customer Service"
( P.25-25) for landline numbers by service area.
708SC transmits on the 2.4 GHz band, employing
frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS)
modulation, with resistance to radio frequency
interference between 1.5 - 5 meters, depending on
usage environment.
xxxvi
Health and Safety Information
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
the scientific literature related to the biological
effects of RF energy.The exposure limit set by the
FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of
Certification Information (SAR)
measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and
(SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to
absorption of RF energy by the human body
exceed the exposure limits for radio frequency (RF)
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The
energy set by the Federal Communications
FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. government. These
safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
FCC exposure limits are derived from the
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial
recommendations of two expert organizations, the
margin of safety to give additional protection to the
National Counsel on Radiation Protection and
public and to account for any variations in
Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical
measurements.SAR tests are conducted using
and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the
standard operating positions accepted by the FCC
recommendations were developed by scientific and
with the phone transmitting at its highest certified
engineering experts drawn from industry,
power level in all tested frequency bands. Although
government, and academia after extensive reviews of
the SAR is determined at the highest certified power
xxxvii
level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
add that positions the handset a minimum of 1.5 cm
operating can be well below the maximum value.
from the body. Non-compliance with the above
This is because the phone is designed to operate at
restrictions may result in violation of FCC RF exposure
multiple power levels so as to use only the power
guidelines. SAR information on this and other model
required to reach the network. In general, the closer
phones can be viewed on-line at www.fcc.gov/oet/
you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower
fccid. This site uses the phone FCC ID number,
the power output.Before a new model phone is
A3L708SC. Sometimes it may be necessary to
available for sale to the public, it must be tested and
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once
certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the
you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone,
exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
follow the instructions on the website and it should
model phone are performed in positions and
provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a
locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the body) as
particular phone. Additional product specific SAR
required by the FCC.
information can also be obtained at www.fcc.gov/
The highest SAR values for this model phone as
cgb/sar.
reported to the FCC are GSM1900 Mode(Part 24)
Head:1.06 W/Kg, Body-worn: 0.692 W/Kg. For
body worn operation, this model phone has been tested
Consumer Information on Wireless
Phones
and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines whenused
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has
with a Samsung accessory designated for this product
published a series of Questions and Answers for
or when used with an accessory that contains no metal consumers relating to radio frequency (RF) exposure
xxxviii
from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes
connected to the telephone wiring in a house,
the following information:
typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus
What kinds of phones are the subject of this
update?
produce RF exposures well within the FCC's
compliance limits.
The term wireless phone refers here to hand-held
Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?
wireless phones with built-in antennas, often called
The available scientific evidence does not show that
°×cell,°± °×mobile,°± or °×PCS°± phones. These
any health problems are associated with using
types of wireless phones can expose the user to
wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that
measurable radio frequency energy (RF) because of
wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones
the short distance between the phone and the user's
emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal
microwave range while being used. They also emit
Communications Commission safety guidelines that
very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode.
were developed with the advice of FDA and other
Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that
located at greater distances from the user, the
does not produce heating effects causes no known
exposure to RF is drastically lower because a
adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF
person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with
exposures have not found any biological effects.
increasing distance from the source. The so-called
Some studies have suggested that some biological
°×cordless phones,°± which have a base unit
effects may occur, but such findings have not been
xxxix
confirmed by additional research. In some cases,
urged the wireless phone industry to take a number
other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing
of steps, including the following:.
those studies, or in determining the reasons for
wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does
• Support needed research into possible biological
effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless
phones;.
• Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes
any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary
for device function; and.
• Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones
with the best possible information on possible
effects of wireless phone use on human health.
with new drugs or medical devices. However, the
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the
agency has authority to take action if wireless phones
federal agencies that have responsibility for different
are shown to emit radio frequency energy (RF) at a
aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at
level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case,
the federal level. The following agencies belong to
FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless
this working group:.
phones to notify users of the health hazard and to
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health.
• Environmental Protection Agency.
• Federal Communications Commission.
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
inconsistent results.
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of
wireless phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of
radiation-emitting consumer products such as
repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard
no longer exists.Although the existing scientific data
do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has
xl
• National Telecommunications and Information
Administration
The National Institutes of Health participates in some
interagency working group activities, as well.
What are the results of the research done
already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting
results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless
their research methods. Animal experiments
phones with the Federal Communications
investigating the effects of radio frequency energy
Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the
(RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones
United States must comply with FCC safety
have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be
guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on
repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies,
FDA and other health agencies for safety questions
however, have suggested that low levels of RF could
about wireless phones.
accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless
animals. However, many of the studies that showed
phone networks rely upon. While these base stations
increased tumor development used animals that had
operate at higher power than do the wireless phones
been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-
themselves, the RF exposures that people get from
causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to
these base stations are typically thousands of times
develop cancer in absence of RF exposure. Other
lower than those they can get from wireless phones.
studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours
Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the
per day. These conditions are not similar to the
safety questions discussed in this document.
conditions under which people use wireless phones,
xli
so we don't know with certainty what the results of
wireless phones would provide some of the data that
such studies mean for human health.
are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could
Three large epidemiology studies have been
be completed in a few years. However, very large
published since December 2000. Between them, the
numbers of animals would be needed to provide
studies investigated any possible association between
reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one
the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer,
exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that
glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of
is directly applicable to human populations, but ten
the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other
or more years' follow-up may be needed to provide
cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the
answers about some health effects, such as cancer.
existence of any harmful health effects from wireless
This is because the interval between the time of
phones RF exposures. However, none of the studies
exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time
can answer questions about long-term exposures,
tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many
since the average period of phone use in these studies
years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies
was around three years.
is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF
exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones.
What research is needed to decide whether
RF exposure from wireless phones poses a
health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and
epidemiological studies of people actually using
xlii
Many factors affect this measurement, such as the
angle at which the phone is held, or which model of
phone is used.
do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides
What is FDA doing to find out more about
the possible health effects of wireless phone
RF?
in government, industry, and academic organizations.
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology
CTIA-funded research is conducted through
Program and with groups of investigators around the
contracts to independent investigators. The initial
the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts
world to ensure that high priority animal studies are
research will include both laboratory studies and
conducted to address important questions about the
studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will
effects of exposure to radio frequency energy
also include a broad assessment of additional
(RF).FDA has been a leading participant in the
research needs in the context of the latest research
World Health Organization international
developments around the world.
Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its
What steps can I take to reduce my
exposure to radio frequency energy from
my wireless phone?
inception in 1996. An influential result of this work
has been the development of a detailed agenda of
research needs that has driven the establishment of
new research programs around the world. The
Project has also helped develop a series of public
information documents on EMF issues.
If there is a risk from these products - and at this
point we do not know that there is - it is probably
very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding
even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps
FDA and Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
to minimize your exposure to radio frequency energy
Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative
(RF). Since time is a key factor in how much
Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to
xliii
exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of
to radio frequency energy (RF), the measures
time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF
described above would apply to children and
exposure.
teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time
• If you must conduct extended conversations by
wireless phone every day, you could place more
distance between your body and the source of the
RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically
with distance. For example, you could use a
headset and carry the wireless phone away from
your body or use a wireless phone connected to a
remote antenna.
of wireless phone use and increasing the distance
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that
wireless phones are harmful. But if you are
concerned about the RF exposure from these
products, you can use measures like those described
above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless
phone use.
What about children using wireless phones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to
users of wireless phones, including children and
teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure
xliv
between the user and the RF source will reduce RF
exposure.
Some groups sponsored by other national
governments have advised that children be
discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For
example, the government in the United Kingdom
distributed leaflets containing such a
recommendation in December 2000. They noted that
no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes
brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit wireless phone use by
children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Do hands-free kits for wireless phones
reduce risks from exposure to RF
emissions?
Do wireless phone accessories that claim to
shield the head from RF radiation work?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to
believe that accessories that claim to shield the head
believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free
from those emissions reduce risks. Some products
kits can be used with wireless phones for
that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use
convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the
special phone cases, while others involve nothing
absorption of RF energy in the head because the
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone.
phone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will
Studies have shown that these products generally do
not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if
not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits,
the phone is mounted against the waist or other part
these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper
of the body during use, then that part of the body will
operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to
absorb more RF energy. Wireless phones marketed in
boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase
the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements
in RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal trade
regardless of whether they are used against the head
Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold
or against the body. Either configuration should
devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users
result in compliance with the safety limit.
from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated
claims. According to FTC, these defendants lacked a
reasonable basis to substantiate their claim.
xlv
What about wireless phone interference
with medical equipment?
wireless phones so that no interference occurs when
Radio frequency energy (RF) from wireless phones
hearing aid at the same time. This standard was
can interact with some electronic devices. For this
approved by the IEEE in 2000.
a person uses a compatible phone and a compatible
reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones
measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of
for possible interactions with other medical devices.
implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators
Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA
from wireless telephones. This test method is now
will conduct testing to assess the interference and
part of a standard sponsored by the Association for
work to resolve the problem.
the Advancement of Medical instrumentation
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures
(AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA,
from various sources can be obtained from the
medical device manufacturers, and many other
following organizations:
groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard
• FCC RF Safety Program:
will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/
pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless
phone EMI. FDA has tested wireless phones and
helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radiation/
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration's
(OSHA):
(IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/
performance requirements for hearing aids and
radiofrequencyradiation/index.html.
xlvi
• National institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH):
When driving a car, driving is your first
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/emfpg.html
behind the wheel of a car, practice good common
• World health Organization (WHO):
sense and remember the following tips:
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/
1. Get to know your wireless phone and its features,
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing
Radiation Protection:
such as speed dial and redial. If available, these
http://www.icnirp.de
• National Radiation Protection Board (UK):
http://www.nrpb.org.uk
• Updated 4/3/2002: US food and Drug
Administration
http://www.fda.gov/cellphones
responsibility. When using your wireless phone
features help you to place your call without taking
your attention off the road.
2. When available, use a hands-free device. If
possible, add an additional layer of convenience and
safety to your wireless phone with one of the many
hands free accessories available today.
3. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be
Road Safety
able to access your wireless phone without removing
Your wireless phone gives you the powerful ability to
your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call
communicate by voice, almost anywhere, anytime.
at an inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it
But an important responsibility accompanies the
for you.
benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must
4. Let the person you are speaking with know you are
uphold.
driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic
xlvii
or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow,
traffic accident or medical emergencies. Remember,
ice and even heavy traffic can be hazardous.
it is a free call on your wireless phone!
5. Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while
9.Use your wireless phone to help others in
driving. Jotting down a “to do” list or flipping
emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in
through your address book takes attention away from
progress or other serious emergency where lives are
your primary responsibility, driving safely.
in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency
6.Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible,
number, as you would want others to do for you.
place calls when you are not moving or before
10.Call roadside assistance or a special non-
pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car
emergency wireless assistance number when
will be stationary. If you need to make a call while
necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing
moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and
no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor
your mirrors, then continue.
traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a
7.Do not engage in stressful or emotional
vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside
conversations that may be distracting. Make people
assistance or other special non-emergency number.
you are talking with aware you are driving and
suspend conversations that have the potential to
divert your attention from the road.
8.Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1
or other local emergency number in the case of fire,
xlviii
“The wireless industry reminds you to
use your phone safely when driving.”
For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE,
or visit our web-site www.wow-com.com Provided
by the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from
Association
radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force
electronic equipment may not be shielded against the
RF signals from your wireless phone. Consult the
manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
in any area and always switch your phone off
whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may
Pacemakers
cause interference or danger. When connecting the
Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a
phone or any accessory to another device, read its
minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained
user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not
between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid
connect incompatible products.
potential interference with the pacemaker.
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment,
These recommendations are consistent with the
users are advised that for the satisfactory operation of
independent research and recommendations of
the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is
Wireless Technology Research.
recommended that the equipment should only be
used in the normal operating position (held to your
ear with the antenna pointing over your shoulder).
Using Your Phone Near Other
Electronic Devices
Persons with pacemakers:
• should always keep the phone more than 15 cm (6
inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is
switched on.
• should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.
xlix
• should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to
minimize potential interference.
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is
taking place, switch your phone off immediately.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with
some hearing aids. In the event of such interference,
you may wish to consult your hearing aid
manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or
inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor
vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its
representative regarding your vehicle. You should
also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your phone off in any facility where posted
Other Medical Devices
notices require you to do so.
If you use any other personal medical devices,
Potentially Explosive Environments
consult the manufacturer of your device to determine
if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy.
Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining
this information. Switch your phone off in health
care facilities when any regulations posted in these
areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care
Switch your phone off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs
and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an
explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even
death.
facilities may be using equipment that could be
Users are advised to switch the phone off while at a
sensitive to external RF energy.
refueling point (service station). Users are reminded
of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio
for essential communications (medical emergencies,
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
for example).
distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting
Remember, to make or receive any calls the phone
operations are in progress.
must be switched on and in a service area with
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are
adequate signal strength. Emergency calls may not
often but not always clearly marked. They include
be possible on all wireless phone networks or when
below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
certain network services and/or phone features are in
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas
use. Check with local service providers.
(such as propane or butane), areas where the air
To make an emergency call:
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or
metal powders, and any other area where you would
normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
1.If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2.Key in the emergency number for your present
location (for example, 911 or other official
Emergency Calls
emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by
This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using
location.
radio signals, wireless and landline networks as well
3.Press [Send]
as user programmed functions, which cannot
If certain features are in use (call barring, for
guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore,
example), you may first need to deactivate those
you should never rely solely on any wireless phone
features before you can make an emergency call.
li
Consult this document and your local cellular service
provider.
When making an emergency call, remember to give
all the necessary information as accurately as
possible. Remember that your phone may be the only
means of communication at the scene of an accident;
do not cut off the call until given permission to do so.
Restricting Children's access to your
Phone
Your phone is not a toy. Children should not be
allowed to play with it because they could hurt
themselves and others, damage the phone or make
calls that increase your phone bill.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
lii
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
• This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers.
different from that to which the receiver is
The use of any unauthorized accessories may be
connected.
dangerous and void the phone warranty if said
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone.
technician for help
Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex
The phone may cause TV or radio interference if
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid
used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The
dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it.
FCC can require you to stop using the phone if such
interference cannot be eliminated.
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane) must comply with the National
Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of
this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association, One Battery march Park, Quincy, MA
02269, Attn: Publication Sales Division..
Cautions
Changes or modifications made in the radio phone,
not expressly approved by Samsung, will void the
user°Øs authority to operate the equipment.
Other Important Safety Information.
• Only qualified personnel should service the phone
or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation
or service may be dangerous and may invalidate
any warranty applicable to the device.
• Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment
in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or
explosive materials in the same compartment as the
phone, its parts or accessories.
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember
that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not
place objects, including both installed or portable
wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in
liii
the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment
is improperly installed and the air bag inflates,
serious injury could result.
• Switch your phone off before boarding an aircraft.
The use of wireless phone in aircraft is illegal and
may be dangerous to the aircraft's operation.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to
the suspension or denial of telephone services to
the offender, or legal action, or both.
Save FeatureIf your phone is unable to find a signal
after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature
is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it
periodically rechecks service availability or you can
check it yourself by pressing any key.
Anytime the Power Save feature is activated, a
message displays on the screen. When a signal is
found, your phone returns to standby mode.
Product Performance
Getting the Most Out of Your Signal
Reception
The quality of each call you make or receive depends
on the signal strength in your area. Your phone
informs you of the current signal strength by
displaying a number of bars next to the signal
strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger
the signal.
If you're inside a building, being near a window may
give you better reception.Understanding the Power
liv
Understanding How Your Phone
Operates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and
receiver. When it's turned on, it receives and
transmits radio frequency (RF) signals. When you
use your phone, the system handling your call
controls the power level. This power can range from
0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode.
Maintaining Your Phone's Peak
Performance
For the best care of your phone, only authorized
use in all areas. Downloadable Ring Tones may be
personnel should service your phone and accessories.
available at an additional cost. Other conditions and
Faulty service may void the warranty.
restrictions may apply. See your service provider for
There are several simple guidelines to operating
your phone properly and maintaining safe,
satisfactory service.
• Hold the phone with the antenna raised, fullyextended and over your shoulder.
• Try not to hold, bend or twist the phone's antenna.
• Don't use the phone if the antenna is damaged.
• Speak directly into the phone's receiver.
• .Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain
or liquid spills. If your phone does get wet,
immediately turn the power off and remove the
battery. If it is inoperable, call Customer Care for
service.
Availability of Various Features/Ring
Tones
Many services and features are network dependent
and may require additional subscription and/or usage
charges. Not all features are available for purchase or
additional information.
Battery Standby and Talk Time
Standby and talk times will vary depending on phone
usage patterns and conditions. Battery power
consumption depends on factors such as network
configuration, signal strength, operating temperature,
features selected, frequency of calls, and voice, data,
and other application usage patterns.
Battery Precautions
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in
any way.
• Use the battery only for its intended purpose..If you
use the phone near the network's base station, it
uses less power; talk and standby time are greatly
affected by the signal strength on the cellular
network and the parameters set by the network
operator.
lv
• Battery charging time depends on the remaining
battery charge and the type of battery and charger
used. The battery can be charged and discharged
hundreds of times, but it will gradually wear out.
When the operation time (talk time and standby
time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time to
buy a new battery.
• If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge
itself over time.
• Use only Samsung-approved batteries and recharge
your battery only with Samsung-approved
chargers. When a charger is not in use, disconnect
it from the power source. Do not leave the battery
connected to a charger for more than a week, since
overcharging may shorten its life.
• Extreme temperatures will affect the charging
capacity of your battery: it may require cooling or
warming first.
• Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, such
as in a car in summer or winter conditions, as you
will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery.
Always try to keep the battery at room temperature.
A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily
not work, even when the battery is fully charged.
lvi
Li-ion batteries are particularly affected by
temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F).
• Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental shortcircuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin,
clip or pen) causes a direct connection between the
+ and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the
battery), for example when you carry a spare
battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the
terminals may damage the battery or the object
causing the short-circuiting.
• Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations. In some areas, the disposal of batteries
in household or business trash may be prohibited.
For safe disposal options for Li-Ion batteries,
contact your nearest Samsung authorized service
center. Always recycle. Do not dispose of batteries
in a fire.
Care and Maintenance
Your phone is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for
many years.
• Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
• Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits.
• Do not use the phone with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to
the phone.
• Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas,
as its moving parts may be damaged.
• Do not store the phone in hot areas. High
temperatures can shorten the life of electronic
devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain
plastics.
• Do not store the phone in cold areas. When the
phone warms up to its normal operating
temperature, moisture can form inside the phone,
which may damage the phone's electronic circuit
boards.
• Do not drop, knock or shake the phone. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
• Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents or
strong detergents to clean the phone. Wipe it with a
soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-andwater solution.
• Do not paint the phone. Paint can clog the device's
moving parts and prevent proper operation.
• Do not put the phone in or on heating devices, such
as a microwave oven, a stove or a radiator. The
phone may explode when overheated.
• When the phone or battery gets wet, the label
indicating water damage inside the phone changes
color. In this case, phone repairs are no longer
guaranteed by the manufacturer's warranty, even if
the warranty for your phone has not expired.
• If your phone has a flash or light, do not use it too
close to the eyes of people or animals. This may
cause damage to their eyes.
• Use only the supplied or an approved replacement
antenna. Unauthorized antennas or modified
accessories may damage the phone and violate
regulations governing radio devices.
• If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is
not working properly, take it to your nearest
lvii
qualified service facility. The personnel there will
assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.
lviii
Getting Started
USIM Card
Getting Started
General Information &
Precautions
• Avoid using excessive force when Inserting/
removing USIM Card.
• SoftBank is not liable for damages resulting from
inserting USIM Card into IC card readers or other
third party devices.
• Always keep USIM Card IC chip clean.
Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Card
• Clean USIM Card IC chip with a soft, dry cloth.
is an IC card containing customer and authentication
• Do not attach labels to USIM Card; malfunction
may result.
information, including handset number and limited
storage for Phonebook entries and SMS. Install
USIM Card to use 708SC; turn 708SC power off to
insert/remove USIM Card.
IC
USIM Card
Insert USIM Card into another compatible handset to
access SMS and Phonebook entries saved on USIM
Card. Note the following precautions regarding
USIM Card usage and care (see USIM Card User
Guide for details):
1-2
1-3
Getting Started
Notes
• USIM Card is the property of SoftBank.
Getting Started
• If USIM Card is lost or damaged, you will be
charged for reissuing it.
• Return USIM Card to SoftBank upon
termination of subscription.
• Returned USIM Cards are recycled.
• USIM Card specifications may change without
prior notice.
• If USIM Card or 708SC with USIM Card
inserted is lost or stolen in Japan or abroad,
immediately contact Customer Service ( P.2525) to suspend service.
• Handset/USIM Card repairs, replacement or
upgrades may deactivate Chaku-Uta®, ChakuUta Full®,
S! Appli, or video files on handset.
• Inserting another USIM Card (not the included
one) into 708SC may deactivate preinstalled S!
Appli or Comic Surfing files on handset.
• Back-up USIM Card files. SoftBank is not liable
1-4for lost files.
Inserting & Removing USIM
Card
CPush in USIM Card until it stops and
locks
remove battery, or insert/remove USIM Card.
Inserting
ARemove battery ( P.1-13)
BWith IC chip down, insert USIM
Card into card slot
IC
Getting Started
Always turn power off before opening 708SC to
Removing
ARemove battery ( P.1-13)
BPress down on USIM Card and
gently slide it out
1-5
Note
USIM PINs
Getting Started
• Inserting USIM Card with excessive force may
damage it or 708SC.
USIM Card features two (4- to 8-digit) security
• Do not misplace a removed USIM Card.
codes:
• To prevent damaging it, avoid touching the IC chip
when Inserting or removing USIM Card. Do not
touch battery contacts.
PIN and PIN2.
PIN
Use PIN to prevent unauthorized use of 708SC by
others.
• Modify PIN ( P.13-2).
• When PIN lock is activated, PIN entry is required
each time 708SC is turned on or whenever USIM
Card is re-inserted ( P.13-3).
PIN2
PIN2 is required for Reset Call Cost or Edit Cost
Limit, etc.
• Modify PIN2 ( P.13-2).
1-6
Canceling PIN Lock (PUK/PUK2
Code)
Getting Started
Incorrectly entering PIN or PIN2 three consecutive
times activates PIN Lock and limits 708SC function
access. Enter PUK (PIN Unlocking Key) Code to
cancel PIN Lock. For more information, contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25).
Note
• Entering PUK or PUK2 incorrectly ten consecutive
times locks USIM Card and deactivates 708SC.
Write down PUK and PUK2.
• Unlocking a locked USIM Card requires a special
procedure. Contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
1-7
Handset Parts &
Functions
rSub Display
Getting Started
sn
tb
Handset
aEarpiece/
Speaker
bDisplay
hRotating Camera
uCharger/External
Device
vBattery Cover
iudlr
a Earpiece/Speaker
cw
de
et
fC
g*
jo
ki
lc
my
c Left Softkey/Mail Key
Open Messaging menu or execute Left Softkey
command/function.
n0~9
d Camera/Character Key
o#
pMicrophone
e Start Key
qInternal
1-8
b Display
Activate Camera or select text entry mode.
Initiate and receive Voice Calls.
f Clear/Back Key
Delete entered text or return to the previous window.
Key
h Camera
Capture images or send video during a Video Call.
i Multi Selector
Select menu items, move cursor, scroll window.
j Right Softkey/Yahoo! Keitai Key
Access Yahoo! Keitai or execute Right Softkey
command/function.
k Switch Bar Key
Display Switch Bar ( P.1-22).
l Center Key
Open Main Menu or execute Center Softkey command/
function.
m Power/End Key
Turn power on/off or end operations.
Enter numbers or characters and select menu items.
o #/Manner Key
Getting Started
Enter line breaks in text entry windows.
In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to open Phone
Profiles.
n Keypad
Toggle Symbols menus in text entry windows.
In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel
Manner Profile.
p Microphone
q Internal Antenna
r Sub Display
s n(Side Key)
Raise volume. Alternatively, enlarge the image during a
Video Call.
t b(Side Key)
Lower volume. Alternatively, reduce the image during
a Video Call.
u Charger/External Device Port
Connect Charger, Stereo Earphone Microphone, USB
Cable, etc. here.
v Battery Cover
Opened to insert/remove battery or USIM Card.
1-9
Tip
Display Indicators
Getting Started
• Internal Antenna
708SC has no external antenna. 708SC transmits and
receives signals via Internal Antenna. Do not cover or
place stickers, etc. over the area containing Internal
Antenna. Voice quality may vary by where/how 708SC
is used.
a b c de f
Signal Strength (more bars
indicate
stronger signal)
Out-of-Range (outside service area or no
signal when Language is set to English or
Out-of-Range (When Language is set to
日本語 )
1-10
3G (UMTS) network connected/roaming
GSM network connected/roaming
Web SSL connected
(Blue) Bluetooth® Active
(Flashing in Blue & Pink) Bluetooth®
Transmission
Bluetooth® Packet Data transmission
Bluetooth®-compatible headset connected
(Blue) USB Connected
(Flashing in Orange & Yellow) USB Active
S! Appli Active
S! Appli Paused
Packet Data transmission
Voice Call in Progress
Video Call in Progress
New S! Mail
New SMS
New Voice Mail
Unheard Answer Machine Message
Software Update Required
Normal Profile
Car Profile
Meeting Profile
Outdoor Profile
Offline Profile
Battery Strong
Battery Moderate
Battery Low
(Flashing) Battery Weak (Charge Now)
Sound settings: Other than Off for Voice Call
in Ringtone volume Set; and On for Voice Call
in Vibration Set
Sound settings: Other than Off for Voice Call
in Ringtone volume Set; and Off for Voice Call
in Vibration Set
Sound settings: Off for Voice Call in Ringtone
volume Set; and On for Voice Call in Vibration
Set
Sound settings: Off for Voice Call in Ringtone
volume Set and Vibration Set
Manner Profile
1-11
Getting Started
i
Getting Started
Roaming Active
Voice Mail/Call Forwarding Active
Answer Machine Active
S! Mail Memory Full
SMS Memory Full
Voice Mail Memory Full
Wake-up Alarm/Alarm Set
New Message
Manner Profile Set; and On for Voice Call in
Tip
• When
(Red) appears, only packet data
transmission and S! Mail sending are available;
Voice Call, received S! Mail notification, and SMS
sending/receiving are disabled.
Sub Display
a b c d e
Signal Strength
(more bars
1-12
indicate stronger signal)
Wake-up Alarm/Alarm Set
Vibration Set
Battery Strong
Battery Moderate
Battery Low
Battery Weak (Charge Now)
Battery & Charger
Before Using Battery or
Charger
Charge battery before first use of 708SC or after
periods of disuse.
Charging Battery
• Battery is a consumable; replace it if operating
time shortens noticeably.
• Long periods of disuse may affect battery's ability
to hold a full charge.
Getting Started
• 708SC uses a lithium-ion battery; charge battery in
any state without damaging its ability to hold a
charge.
• Do not charge battery under the following
conditions:
- Where the ambient temperature is below 5°C or
above 40°C
- Where there are high levels of humidity,
vibrations or dust
- Near a radio receiver (May cause feedback)
• 708SC or Charger may warm while charging. This
is normal, however, should they become very hot
to the touch, stop charging and contact Customer
Service ( P.25-25).
• Charge battery at least once every six months
while not in use. Otherwise, battery may become
unusable.
1-13
1
Note
- Media Player use
• Use specified Charger only.
- Excessive Keypad use (e.g. for gaming or
Getting Started
• Battery must be inside 708SC to charge it.
• When not in use, unplug Charger from outlet or
cigarette lighter socket.
Battery Life
Battery time/life may be reduced by any of the
following:
• Environmental Factors
- Storing/using 708SC in places with ambient
temperature or above 5°C below 40°C
- Using 708SC in when signal is poor/leaving it
on out-of-range
- Allowing debris to collect on 708SC, battery or
Charger Port
• Operational Factors
- Active S! Appli
- Camera use
1-14
messaging, etc.)
- Bluetooth® transmissions
- Frequently opening and closing 708SC
• Settings
- Using Slide Show
- Setting Brightness higher or Backlight Time
longer
- Using Media Player with Backlight set to
Always on
Battery Disposal
Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary
refuse. Tape over battery terminals before disposal or
take to a SoftBank shop. Follow any and all local
regulations regarding battery disposal.
Lithium-ion batteries are recyclable.
When Battery Runs Out
When battery is weak, a warning appears and 708SC
BFully remove Battery Cover as shown
will automatically turn off.
Inserting & Removing Battery
Inserting
APress Battery Cover and slide as
shown
CAlign Battery Slots and 708SC Tabs
to insert battery as shown
708SC Tabs
1-15
Getting Started
beeps. Charge or replace battery; otherwise 708SC
1
Getting Started
DInsert Battery Cover Tabs into 708SC
Slots to attach Battery Cover as
shown
Battery Cover Tabs
APress Battery Cover and slide as
shown
BFully remove Battery Cover as shown
Note
• Remove battery cover with care; stress on tabs may
damage them.
• Gently insert battery to avoid damaging 708SC
tabs.
Removing
Always turn 708SC off before removing battery.
Never remove battery while AC Charger or In-Car
Charger is connected.
1-16
CLift battery up and remove as shown
BPlug Charger into an AC 100V outlet
AC 100V
AC Charger
Use specified Charger only.
AOpen Port Cover and insert Charger
Connector into the port
Getting Started
Charge
CWhen battery is charged, unplug
Charger from outlet, then from
708SC
Port Cover
Charger Connector
(with △ mark
upward)
1-17
Tip
Getting Started
• Battery Charged Confirmation
When 708SC is on while Charger is connected, battery
indicators flash when battery is fully charged.
While charging, battery indicators change as follows:
→
→
If 708SC is off while Charger is connected, battery
indicator and graphic appear full on Sub Display &
Battery full appears above graphic on Display when
battery is fully charged. Otherwise, Charging...
appears above animation on Display.
• Charging Time
An empty battery requires 120 minutes (approx.) to
charge when power on and Display off (no operation).
Longer when Display on. Charging time may vary by
ambient temperature.
Charging via PC USB Port
Battery will charge when 708SC is connected to a PC
via included USB cable.
a Open Port Cover and insert USB Cable Connector
b Insert USB Connector into a PC USB port
c When battery is charged, remove Connector from
708SC and replace Port Cover, then remove USB
Connector from the PC USB port
1-18
Charging via USB takes more time; charging time will
vary by PC. A weak battery may not charge via a PC
USB port.
In-Car Charger (Optional)
AOpen Port Cover and insert
Connector Plug
Port Cover
Charger
Connector
(with △ mark
BInsert Charger Connector into
lighter socket
Lighter Socket
Tip
Charger
In-Car
• Battery Charged Confirmation ( P.1-15)
Getting Started
• Charging Time ( P.1-15)
• When using In-Car Charger
See In-Car Charger manual. For safety, use In-Car
Holder together with In-Car Charger.
CStart the car's engine
DWhen battery is charged, remove InCar Charger Connector, replace Port
Cover, then remove Charger
Connector from lighter socket
Note
• Do not charge battery in ambient temperatures
over 40°C (e.g. inside a closed automobile in direct
sunlight, etc.).
• Use In-Car Charger in cars with minus-earth only
(DC 12/24V).
Power On/Off
Power On
AOpen 708SC
BPress y for 1+ seconds
1-19
Power Off
Getting Started
APress y for 2+ seconds
Time & Date
Standby
Time & Date
Tip
• To confirm handset phone number
In Standby, press c → 0; save or edit your
information in My Phonebook Details including name
and mail address ( P.5-16).
• When PIN lock is activated
PIN entry is required each time 708SC is turned on.
• When 708SC is left open without operations
Display automatically shuts down to conserve power.
Note
• Use both hands to open and close 708SC; avoid
using excessive force which could damage handset
or lead to malfunctions.
1-20
Default
Setting
■
■
Time format: 24H
Date format: YYYY/MM/DD
Some 708SC functions cannot be used unless time
and date are set. Open Time & Date to change Time
Format or Date Format.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Time & date
BAdjust settings
To set time
Highlight Time field and enter the time (24-hour
format)
Time Zone Updating
Default
aHighlight Time field and press r twice for
Setting
AM/PM option
bUse r to toggle AM and PM
To set date
Highlight Date field and enter the year, month,
and day
To change time format
aSelect Time format field
bSelect the setting and press c
To change date format
■
Prompt first
Automatically update 708SC Date & Time using
server's time zone information.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Time & Date
BSelect Time zone updating and
perform operations to set
CPress w (Save)
aSelect Date format field
bSelect the setting and press c
CPress w (Save)
1-21
Getting Started
To set AM/PM (for 12-hour format)
Tip
Getting Started
• The contents of Time zone updating are:
Manual only: Automatic update unavailable.
Prompt first: When moving to the country/district with
different time zone, update Time & Date according to
the current time zone.
Automatic: After set to this setting, 708SC turns the
power off and on automatically; and update Time &
Date according to the server's time zone information
(Home time zone, Date, Time, etc.). Note that the
information availability varies by network. If no
information are available, use one of above settings.
Changing Home Time Zone
Default
Setting
■
■
Home zone: GMT+9h
Daylight saving: Unchecked
Change time zone to the place you use handset.
Daylight saving time can also be set.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Time & date
BSelect Home zone field
CPerform operations to set
To set home time zone
aUse s to specify a target area
bPress c
To set daylight saving time
aCheck Daylight saving
bPress w (OK)
DPress w (Save)
1-22
708SC Menus
CRepeat Step 2 to open/activate the
target function
Main Menu
 Select Display settings → Wallpaper
Select Settings
Select Display
settings
Wallpaper Setup
Window appears
Select Wallpaper
Pictures
Main Menu
BHighlight an item and press c
(Select)
1-23
Getting Started
AIn Standby, press c
Tip
Getting Started
• To end an operation
Press y. Operation ends and 708SC returns to
Standby. When multiple functions are active, the next
active operation window appears.
• To cancel/escape an operation
Press y. Operation/function is canceled and 708SC
returns to Standby or the previous window appears. For
some menus, a confirmation appears.
• Menu operations ( P.xiv)
When Popup Menu ( P.8-6) is On
Display is different (Step 2), however operations remain
the same.
Selecting items with Keypad
When numbered items appear in menus, etc., use
keypad to select them.
Shortcuts
In Standby, press a key to open the assigned shortcut.
Key
Corresponding Menu/Function
Messaging
Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu
Yahoo! Keitai Menu
(1+ seconds)
Mobile Camera (last used function)
Switch Bar
Idle shortcut*
Phonebook list
Call Log (Received)
Call Log (Dialled)
Call Log (Current Contacts)
Phone Profiles
(1+ seconds)
Activate/Cancel Manner Profile
(1+ seconds)
* Create shortcuts for frequently used functions in Idle
shortcut ( P.15-7).
1-24
Switch Bar
Initiate Call, Messaging, Yahoo! Keitai, or Media
To exit all active functions
aPress i
bUse s to highlight End all? and press c
(Yes)
create a message while listening to music, or browse
the Mobile Internet while talking on the phone).
Tip
• When exiting all active functions
Even if during message creation or mobile Internet site
access via Yahoo! Keitai, all active functions ends at
once without confirmation messages. Press y once
for each function to exit after confirmation. Exiting all
active functions during message creation or voice/
video recording, also deletes created/recorded data.
AIn Standby or an active function
window, press i
BUse s to highlight a function and
press c (Select)
Options
When Options appears at bottom-right of Display,
press o to open Options. To execute an option,
highlight the item and press c (Select).
To exit an active function
From the window of the function to exit, press
Tip
• See "Options" ( P.xiv)
1-25
Getting Started
Player; use multiple functions concurrently (e.g.,
Security Codes
Network Password
Getting Started
Phone Password, Center Access Code and Network
"9999" is set by default; required to restrict handset
Password are required to use 708SC.
services. Entering Network Password incorrectly
three consecutive times locks Call Barring settings.
Phone Password
"9999" is set by default; required to use/change some
708SC functions.
• Entered digits are represented with*
• If incorrect, an error message appears; try again.
• Change Phone Password as required
Center Access Code
The 4-digit number specified at subscription;
required for Optional Services or to subscribe to feebased Web information services.
For details, contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
1-26
To resolve, Network Password and Center Access
Code must be changed. For details, contact Customer
Service
( P.25-25).
• Network Password can be changed on 708SC
( P.16-13).
Note
• Write down Phone Password, Center Access Code,
or Network Password. If you forget any of these
codes contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
• Do not reveal Phone Password, Center Access
Code, or Network Password to others. SoftBank is
not liable for damages caused by misuse of these
codes by others.
Basic Handset Operations
Initiating a Call
See P.5-9 to call from a Phonebook entry or P.6-2 for
Video Calls.
Basic Handset Operations
AEnter a phone number
• When Stereo Earphone Microphone is connected
Enter a number and press Stereo Earphone Microphone
switch for 1+ seconds to initiate a call. When
Earphone call is set to On, press switch for 1+ seconds
to call specified number. Press switch for 1+ seconds to
end a call.
• Engaged Call Operations ( P.2-7)
When Phonebook list appears ( P.5-11)
To use Speed Dialing ( P.5-12)
BConfirm the number and press t
CPress y to end the call
Tip
• To correct entered digits
Press C to delete the last digit. Press C for 1+
seconds to delete all.
• When the line is busy
Press y to end the call and try again later. If Auto
Redial is active, number is automatically redialed.
Press o (Cancel) or y to cancel.
2-2
Placing international calls from Japan
A separate subscription is required for international
calls.
a Enter a phone number
b Select Options → International dial
c Select country or Enter Code for direct entry
d Select Japan
e Confirm the number and press t
Using a SoftBank handset overseas
Enter handset phone number; country code is not
required.
Calling from overseas ( P.2-14)
Options
Item
Description
Initiate a Video Call.
Add to
Phonebook
Save a number to Phonebook or
USIM Card Phonebook ( P.5-6).
Create msg
Open a new message addressed to
the number ( P.17-6).
Phonebook
Open Phonebook Search window.
Call log
Open Call Log.
International dial
Add international code and
country code to a number ( P.22).
Initiate a Voice/Video Call with
your number Shown/Hidden.
Select None to follow Caller ID
Hide/Show my ID
settings. Select Show my ID to
show your number. Select Hide
my ID to hide your number.
AWhen 708SC rings/vibrates, press
t or c (Accept)
BPress y to end the call
Tip
• When Anykey Answer is set to On
Press any key except w, o, y, or Side Key n b
to answer Voice Calls.
• To mute 708SC ringer for an incoming call
While 708SC rings/vibrates, press w (Mute); caller
continues to hear ringback tone. To answer the call,
press c (Accept).
• To adjust ringer volume
While 708SC rings/vibrates, press Side Key n or b.
• When Stereo Earphone Microphone is connected
When 708SC rings/vibrates, press Stereo Earphone
Microphone switch for 1+ seconds to accept a call.
Press again for 1+ seconds to end the call.
• Engaged Call Operations ( P.2-7)
2-3
Basic Handset Operations
Video call
Receiving a Call
2
Basic Handset Operations
Ringtones
When you cannot answer a call
Specify ringtones for saved numbers by Phonebook
entry or Category ( P.5-4, 5-7). When no ringtone is
set, 708SC rings according to Profile Settings ( P.9-2).
Under following conditions, 708SC rings according to
each Mode; Secret Mode is set to Hide and
Phonebook(contains caller's number as an entry)'s
Secret Mode is set to On.
Use Call Forwarding/Voice Mail to forward incoming
calls to a specified number automatically/to save
messages at Voice Mail Center. When Call Forwarding
or Voice Mail is set to No reply, press o (Busy) to
forward an incoming call immediately ( P.16-3, 16-5).
Use Answer Machine to record caller messages. Up to 3
messages (15 seconds per message) can be recorded in
708SC ( P.2-5).
Incoming call window
If caller sends Caller ID, phone number appears; if
saved in Phonebook, name appears. When an image is
set in Phonebook or Category, image also appears
( P.5-4, 5-7). If caller hides Caller ID, Withheld
appears.
Under following conditions, no name/image appears;
Secret Mode is set to Hide and Phonebook(contains
caller's number as an entry)'s Secret Mode is set to On.
Missed call window
After an unanswered incoming call, Missed call
window appears. Press w (View), to open Missed Call
Log ( P.2-9).
2-4
Reject Incoming Call
Proactively disconnect an incoming call without
answering it. The rejected call is recorded in Missed.
AWhile 708SC rings/vibrates, press
Tip
• When Side Key is set to Reject
Reject an incoming call by pressing Side Key n or b
for 1+ seconds.
• To automatically reject a call ( P.13-8)
Answer Machine
Record caller messages on handset. Up to 3 messages
(15 seconds per message) can be recorded.
Default
■
Off
Setting
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Answer machine → Setting
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Note
• Answer Machine cannot be used when handset is
off, out-of-range or in Offline mode. Use Voice Mail
to record caller messages while incoming
transmissions are blocked.
• If the free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15)
on 708SC is less than 600K bytes, you cannot use
Answer Machine.
With Answer Machine set
In Standby,
appears.
2-5
Basic Handset Operations
• To reject call and send a busy message
When neither Call Forwarding ( P.16-2) nor Voice
Mail ( P.16-2) is active, press o (Busy) to
proactively disconnect a call without answering it;
"busy" message appears on the caller's handset before
the call is disconnected. If the caller's handset is
incompatible the call is simply disconnected.
Activating & Canceling
Ringing Duration
Default
■
10 seconds
Setting
Basic Handset Operations
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Answer machine →
Ringing duration
BSelect an item or Other (0-60Secs) to
set a time
CPress c (Save)
Sound Language
Default
■
日本語
Setting
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Answer machine → Sound
language
2-6
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Checking Recordings
When Answer Machine records caller messages,
appears in Display.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Answer machine →
Recordings
BHighlight the message to check and
press c (Play)
Tip
• To delete messages
Highlight the message to delete, press w (Delete)
and select Yes.
Engaged Call Operations
Earpiece Volume
Adjust Earpiece or Earphone volume. Setting
Speaker Phone
ADuring a call, press c (
select Yes
) and
Press c (
ADuring a call, press Side Key n or b
Voice Recording
Hold
Record voice of a maximum of 2 minutes during a
When a call is put on hold, the party on hold hears a
call.
hold tone and neither party can hear the other's voice.
ADuring a call, select Options →
Record
A subscription to Call Waiting ( P.16-8) or
Conference Call ( P.16-9) is required before calls
can be placed on hold.
ADuring a call, press w (Hold)
BPress c (Record)
BPress w (Retrieve) to reconnect the
call
2-7
Basic Handset Operations
To cancel Speaker Phone
remains even after power off.
CPerform operations to stop/pause
Engaged Call Options
To stop and save
Press w (Stop)
Item
Description
Whisper on/off
With On, raise the volume of sent
sounds even when lowering your
voice.
Mute
Check Voice or Key tone and press
w (OK) to cancel sending no sounds
or key tones.
• Recorded voice
Recorded voice files are saved to Sounds & Ringtones
folder in Data Folder.
New call
Enter a number and press c (Call) to
initiate another call; requires a
subscription to Conference Call
( P.16-9).
• When another party calls during recording
With Call Waiting subscription, stops ongoing
recording and incoming call window appears.
Phonebook
Open Phonebook Search window.
Add to
Phonebook
Save number to Phonebook or USIM
Card Phonebook ( P.5-6).
Create msg
Open a new message addressed to the
number ( P.17-6).
Send DTMF
Enter digits then press c (Send) to
send tones.
Record
Record caller's voice during a call
( P.2-7).
To pause and save
Basic Handset Operations
aPress c (Pause)
bPress c (Record) to restart recording; press
w (Save) to end recording
Tip
• When 708SC ends a call during recording
708SC stops recording automatically and saves the
voice files.
2-8
Item
Description
Create and save text memos ( P.1410).
End call
Disconnect call.
Switch to
headset/Switch
to phone
Appears when Bluetooth®-compatible
headset is in use. Select headset or
phone (handset).
Call Log Records
Viewing Call Log Records
Current
contacts
All incoming and outgoing calls
Missed
All missed incoming calls
Received
All received incoming calls
Dialled
All outgoing calls
APress r
BUse s to select a Call Log
To confirm the number and call duration for
a record
Highlight an item and press c (View)
Call Log Record Indicators
: Voice Call to/from a number
saved in Phonebook
: Call to/from a number saved in USIM Card
Phonebook
: Voice Call to/from an unsaved number
: Video Call to/from a number saved in Phonebook
Current Contacts (all incoming/outgoing calls)
Indicators
: Received call
: Rejected incoming call
: Missed call
: Dialed call
Tip
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide
Phonebook(contains a Call Log record's number as an
entry)'s Secret Mode is set to On; the name of a Call
Log record does not appear.
Calling from Call Log Records
2-9
Basic Handset Operations
Memo
APress r
BUse s to select a Call Log
CHighlight a record and press t
To initiate a Video Call
Select Options → Video call
Basic Handset Operations
Deleting Call Log Records
Deleting One Record
Delete one Call Log record.
APress r
BUse s to select a Call Log
CHighlight a record, select Options →
Delete → Selected → Yes
Tip
• To delete individual calls from records
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Highlight a record and press c (View)
c Highlight a call, select Options → Delete →
Selected → Yes
2-10
Deleting All Records
Item
Description
Delete all Call Log records at once.
Delete
Delete the current Call Log record
( P.2-10).
APress r
Add to black list
Add the number to Black List
( P.13-9).
BSelect Options → Delete → All → Yes
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
Call Log Options
Item
International dial
Add international code and country
code to the number ( P.2-2).
Hide/Show my
ID
Initiate a Voice/Video Call with your
number Shown/Hidden. Select None
to follow Caller ID settings. Select
Show my ID to show your number.
Select Hide my ID to hide your
number.
Description
Voice call
Initiate a Voice Call to the current
number.
Video call
Initiate a Video Call to the current
number ( P.2-9).
Add to
Phonebook
Save number to Phonebook or USIM
Card Phonebook ( P.5-6).
Create msg
Open a new message addressed to the
current number ( P.17-6).
View phonebook
Open Entry details for a number.
details
Call Manager
Data counter
Confirm/reset incoming/outgoing data
volume.
Call costs
Confirm/reset Total Costs, Last Call
Cost or Cost Limit; change Call Costs
currency unit.
2-11
Basic Handset Operations
Use s to select Current contacts
Call times
Confirm/reset incoming/outgoing
Voice/Video Call Times.
aIn Call Costs, select Options → Reset call
cost
bEnter PIN2 and press c (Confirm)
Data Counter, Call Costs, &
Call Times
Basic Handset Operations
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Call manager
BSelect an item
To reset Data counter
aIn Data counter, highlight item to reset, select
Options → Reset
bSelect Yes
To reset all Data counter
aIn Data counter, highlight item to reset, select
Options → Reset all
bEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm), and select Yes
To reset Call Costs
2-12
To reset Call Times
aIn Call Times, highlight item to reset, select
Options → Reset → Yes
Edit Cost Limit
After reaching the call cost limit, only emergency
To reset all Call Times
calls ( P.2-15) can be initiated; messaging, web
aIn Call Times, highlight item to reset, select
connections (fee-based operations) are disabled.
bEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm) → Yes
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Call manager
To change Call Costs currency unit
BSelect Call costs
aIn Call Costs, select Options → Setup
CSelect Options → Edit cost limit
currency
bEnter PIN2 and press c (Confirm)
DEnter PIN2 and press c (Confirm)
cHighlight Price field to enter a price in Yen
EEnter limit
dHighlight Currency field and enter the
currency unit.
ePress w (Save)
Display Call Cost during a Call
Default
■
Off
Setting
2-13
Basic Handset Operations
Options → Reset all
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Call manager → Display
call cost
Basic Handset Operations
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
International Roaming
A separate subscription is required for international
calls. Contact Customer Service for more
information about international roaming.
Changing Network Mode
Default
■
3G
Setting
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Network mode
BSelect the setting
Tip
• The contents of Network mode are:
Automatic: Network is set automatically by location.
GSM 900/1800: Available overseas.
GSM 1900: Available overseas.
3G: Available domestically and overseas.
Network Setup
Selecting a Network
Default
■
Automatic
Setting
Select a network (operator) by location or use
automatic setting.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Network selection
BSelect the setting
To select automatically
Select Automatic
2-14
To select a specific network
bSelect Options → Insert or Add → New
aSelect Manual
bSelect a network
Preferred Networks
network
cEnter network settings and press w (Insert/
Add)
To delete a network from Preferred
Networks
them to the end. Select networks from Network List
Highlight network to delete, select Options →
or create new network entries.
Delete → Yes
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Preferred networks
BEdit Preferred Networks
To insert/add a network from Network List
aWhen inserting, highlight insert position
bSelect Options → Insert or Add →
Tip
• New Network Settings
Country code
Up to 3 digits
Network code
Up to 3 digits
Network name Up to 20 single-byte alphanumerics
Network type
GSM or 3G
Network list
cSelect a network and press c (Insert/Add)
To insert/add a new network
aWhen inserting, highlight insert position
Calling from Outside Japan
AEnter phone number including area
code
2-15
Basic Handset Operations
Insert networks into Preferred Networks list or add
To call an in-country landline or mobile
phone
Emergency Calls
Basic Handset Operations
Proceed to Step 5
Some emergency numbers (110 (Police), 119 (Fire),
To enter country code, etc. directly
etc.) are available even when certain Call Barring
Press 0 for 1+ seconds to enter +, enter
settings are active. See details below.
country code and phone number omitting the
708SC Status
Available Numbers
first 0 (except when calling landlines in Italy)
Offline mode ( P.3-4) is active.
None
and proceed to Step 5
Call Cost limit exceeded ( P.212).
110, 119, 118
BSelect Options → International dial
CSelect country or Enter Code for
direct entry
DSelect Abroad
EConfirm number and press t
708SC is locked ( P.13-5).
None
Required PIN not entered ( P.133).
None
USIM Card cannot be
authenticated ( P.13-4).
None
Outgoing Call Barring ( P.16-11)
110, 119, 118
is active.
Note
Tip
• To change/add International code or country code
( P.15-2)
2-16
• SoftBank can not guarantee connections in all
countries and regions. Handset operations may
vary by network, signal, or function settings.
2-17
2
Basic Handset Operations
2-18
Manner Profile
Minding Mobile Manners
Manner Related Functions
Manner Profile
Please take care not to disturb others when using
708SC offers two manner-related profiles.
your handset.
Manner Profile:
• Turn 708SC off in theaters, museums, and other
places where silence is the norm.
Silence 708SC sounds and activate Vibration for all
• Keep 708SC off aboard airplanes, inside hospitals,
or in other places where handset use is prohibited.
or cancel Manner Profile.
alerts, tones, and alarms. Use Manner Key to activate
• Refrain from using 708SC in places such as
restaurants, hotel lobbies, or elevators.
Offline Profile:
• Observe announcements or posted instructions
regarding handset use aboard trains, etc.
708SC functions may still be used while Offline
• Refrain from handset use that interrupts the flow of
pedestrian or vehicle traffic.
Temporarily suspend 708SC transmissions; other
Profile is active.
Muting/vibrating 708SC can be selected respectively
for alert tone, ringtone, or alarm in Sound settings
other than Manner/Offline profile.
3-2
Manner Profile
AIn Standby, press # for 1+
seconds
Tip
• Even when Manner Profile is active, shutter click
sounds for Camera.
Changing Profile
Profiles
Select a Profile depending on usage and edit settings as
required ( P.9-2).
Description
Normal sounds produced by 708SC
Manner
No sounds produced by 708SC
Car
Set Automatic reception of Voice
Calls and activation of Speaker
Phone for use while driving
Meeting
Ringtone or Key tone preset to
Vibration or Mute
Outdoor
Ringtone or Key tone preset to
maximum sound volume
708SC features five Profiles, including Manner
Profile.
Profile
Normal
AIn Standby, press * for 1+
seconds
BSelect a Profile
CPress c (Save)
3-3
Manner Profile
• When Manner Profile is active
appears.
Tip
• To change 708SC Profile ( P.9-2)
Offline Mode
Default
■
Off
Setting
APress c and select Settings→ Call
settings → Offline mode
Manner Profile
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
• Turning 708SC Off with Offline mode active
When turning on again, a confirmation for use of
Offline mode appears. Press o (No) to select Normal
Profile.
3-4
Entering Text
*Suggestions appear only in Kanji/Hiragana mode, when
Prediction setting is On.
Text Entry
Enter kanji/hiragana/hangul, single- or double-byte
Number Only Text Entry Fields
katakana, alphanumerics, or symbols/pictograms/
Text entry windows do not appear for Phonebook Phone
fields or Alarm Time fields; enter numbers directly into
these fields.
emoticons.
Text Entry Window
Entering Text
Current Entry Mode
: Kanji/Hiragana
: Double-byte Katakana
: Double-byte
Alphanumerics
: Double-byte Numbers
: Double-byte Symbols
: Pictograms
: Hangul
Changing Text Entry Mode
Text Entry modes may be limited in some text entry
: Single-byte Katakan
: Single-byte
Alphanumerics
: Single-byte
: Single-byte
: Emoticons
fields or windows.
AIn a text entry window, press e
Number of characters that still can be entered
Text entry field
Text entry field
Suggestions*
Japanese kana conversion alternatives
4-2
BHighlight entry mode and press c
Tip
• To toggle symbols
In text entry windows, press # to toggle Symbols,
Pictograms, and Emoticons.
Key Assignments
Multiple characters are assigned to each key. Press a key repeatedly until the target character appears.
Press * to add ゛or ゜ to kana or enter line breaks and # to toggle symbols.
Key
Kanji/Hiragana
Katakana
Alphanumerics
Numbers
.@-_/:~11
abcABC2
defDEF3
ghiGHI4
jklJKL5
mnoMNO6
pqrsPQRS7
tuvTUV8
wxyzWXYZ9
,.-_!?〈Space〉0
• Toggle between upperand lower-case
• Enter Line Break
Enter Line Break
Entering Text
1 あいうえおぁぃぅぇぉ 1 アイウエオァィゥェォ 1
カキクケコ2
2 かきくけこ2
3 さしすせそ3
サシスセソ3
4 たちつてとっ 4
タチツテトッ 4
ナニヌネノ5
5 なにぬねの5
6 はひふへほ6
ハヒフヘホ6
7 まみむめも7
マミムメモ7
ヤユヨャュョ 8
8 やゆよゃゅょ 8
9 らりるれろ9
ラリルレロ9
わをんゎ、。−・∼！？ ワヲンヮ 2、。−・∼！？
〈Space〉0
〈Space〉0
• Toggle between upper- and lower-case or add ゛or ゜
to unfixed, convertible kana
• Enter Line Break
4-3
Key
Kanji/Hiragana
Katakana
Alphanumerics
• Reverse toggle characters assigned to the same key before finalizing character
selection
• Toggle Pictograms, Double-byte Symbols, Single-byte Symbols, Emoticons
1 When double-byte, "~" cannot be used ("∼"appears on Display).
2 Single-byte "ヮ " (lower case) cannot be entered.
Entering Text
4-4
Numbers
Toggle Pictograms,
Double-byte Symbols,
Single-byte Symbols,
Emoticons
When calls/alarms interrupt text entry
To add ゛or ゜
Answer incoming calls without saving text first;
disconnect call to return to text entry window. Similarly,
close Alarm window to return to text entry window.
Enter a valid character and press *
Entering Characters
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the character then enter the
correction
When key is pressed too many times
Hiragana/Kanji
Press # to return to the previous character
Enter hiragana/kanji with or without conversion
assigned to the same key
predictions. When Prediction setting is On,
To enter consecutive characters assigned to
Suggestions appear below text entry window.
the same key
Press r to move cursor to the right
To enter unconverted hiragana
Press c (Confirm)
4-5
Entering Text
AActivate Kanji/Kana entry mode to
enter hiragana
BConvert hiragana
To select a conversion from Suggestions
aPress d to move between Suggestions
bHighlight a conversion and press c
(Confirm)
Tip
• When characters do not convert to the intended
Kanji
Try entering different readings of the Kanji. When
multiple Kanji characters do not convert together, try
to convert them separately.
• To switch the contents in Suggestions between a
predicted/conversion alternatives
If you press w (Convert) while predicted alternatives
are displayed, conversion alternative will be displayed,
and if you press w (Predict) while conversion
alternatives are displayed, predicted alternatives
appear.
Entering Text
When the desired conversion does not appear
aPress w (Convert)
bUse s to change the conversion range
cPress d to move to Suggestions
dHighlight a conversion and press c
(Confirm)
eRepeat steps b through d as required
4-6
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
• To convert easily by using User dictionary ( P.4-15)
• To enter date/time
a Press a key to enter a key to which numbers are
assigned
b Press o (EngNumｶﾅ)
c Highlight a conversion alternative and press c
(Confirm)
Resetting Text Entry History
Enter a Katakana to which a voiced or semi-
As for predicted/conversion alternatives, character
strings/kanji converted in the past take priority to
appear. Restore the displayed contents to defaults.
a Press c and select Settings → Phone settings →
User dictionary → Reset learning
b Enter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes
voiced sound symbol should be added and press
Katakana
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the character and press the
correct key
When key is pressed too many times
Press # to return to the previous character
assigned to the same key
To enter consecutive characters assigned to
the same key
Press r to move cursor to the right
To add ゛or ゜
4-7
Entering Text
AIn Katakana mode, press a key to
enter the assigned character
Tip
• To enter Katakana in Kanji/Kana entry mode
For example, to convert "くも" to "クモ" or "ｸﾓ".
Alphanumerics
AIn Alphanumerics entry mode, press
a key to enter the assigned character
Entering Text
a In Kanji/Kana entry mode, enter hiragana
b Press o (EngNumｶﾅ)
c Highlight katakana conversion alternative and press
c (Confirm)
To toggle upper and lower case
Enter a character and press *
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the character and press the
correct key
When key is pressed too many times
Press # to return to a previous character
assigned to the same key
4-8
To enter consecutive characters assigned to
the same key
Press r to move cursor to the right
Tip
AIn Number entry mode, press
number keys
Entering Text
• To enter alphanumerics in Kanji/Kana entry mode
Press key(s) assigned to alphanumerics as many times
as it would take to enter same character(s) in
Alphanumerics mode. For example, press 2 three
times and press 3 once to enter "cd."
a In Kanji/Kana entry mode, press a key to which
alphanumerics are assigned
b Press o (EngNumｶﾅ)
c Highlight alphanumeric conversion alternative and
press c (Confirm)
Numbers
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the entry, then enter
correction
Tip
• To enter numbers in Kanji/Kana entry mode
a In Kanji/Kana entry mode, press a key to which
numbers are assigned
b Press o (EngNumｶﾅ)
c Highlight number conversion alternative and press
c (Confirm)
4-9
Symbols, Pictograms, &
Emoticons
AIn a text entry window, press # to
toggle symbols
BHighlight target character and press
To enter symbols, pictograms, or emoticons
successively
Press w (Continue)
To toggle double-byte symbols and singlebyte symbols
Press * while Suggestions for double-byte
Entering Text
symbols and single-byte symbols appear
Tip
• To enter symbols, pictograms, or emoticons in
Kanji/Kana entry mode
Enter hiragana like てん and press w (Convert),
symbols
・and … appear among conversion alternatives.
Similarly, convert はーと or でんわ to pictograms and
わーい or えーん to emoticons.
4-10
Line Breaks
Enter a line break the same way in all text entry
modes.
AIn a text entry window, press *
Quoting Saved Text
In a text entry window, use SMS template via Options
to quote saved text in SMS.
Save frequently used words/phrases as SMS
templates beforehand ( P.4-16).
AIn message text, select Options →
SMS template
In a text entry window, use Phonebook via Options to
BSelect a template
search saved entries for inserting phone numbers or
Using Template
mail addresses into message text.
AIn message text, select Options →
Phonebook
BSelect an entry and open details
CHighlight an item and press c
(Select)
In a text entry window, use Templates via Options to
save ".ne.jp" or "http://www" in Phonebook for one
keystroke entry.
AIn message text, select Options →
Templates
BSelect an item
4-11
Entering Text
Using Phonebook Entries
SMS Template
Hangul
Editing Text
Select Hangul entry mode to enter Hangul characters.
AIn a text entry window, press e and
select Hangul
Entering Text
BPress number keys to enter assigned
character units that appear; combine
several consonants and vowels
Consonant Example (Key Assignment)
(once)
(twice)
02
( ), 1 (
02
( ), 3
02
4-12
), 2 ( )
( ), 3 (
The character before cursor is deleted.
To delete all text on/after cursor
Press C for 1+ seconds
To delete all text
(three times)
Place cursor at the end of text and press C
0122
0221
0223
), 1 (
When a space is highlighted
Vowel Example (Key Assignment)
01
Deleting
AHighlight character to delete and
press C
), 2 ( ),
for 1+ seconds
Copy/Cut, Paste, & Undo
Copy/Cut
Select a range of characters to copy/cut. Paste
copied/cut characters repeatedly to other locations.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Copy or Cut
To copy/cut all
Press o (All)
CUse a to specify range and press
c (End)
• When copy/cut items
Up to 10 copied/cut items can be saved. The contents
remains even after turning power off. With 10 items
already saved, oldest items are automatically deleted.
Paste
Entering Text
BUse a to highlight the first
character in the range and press
c (Start)
Tip
• To copy text from Phonebook entries or My
Phonebook Details
Select Options → Copy item ( P.5-14, 5-17)
AUse a to move cursor to paste
location
BSelect Options → Paste
CSelect an item to paste and press
c (Select)
4-13
Tip
• To delete copied/cut items
In Step 3, highlight item to delete, press w (Delete)
and select Yes.
Undo
Prediction On/Off
(Japanese Only)
Select to show/hide Japanese kana conversion
alternatives in Suggestions.
Default
Undo operations immediately after performing such
as Cut, Paste, or Delete. Alternatively, undo
Entering Text
converting operations immediately after character
conversion; this operation can be performed in Kanji/
Kana entry mode only.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Undo
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Jump → Top or End
4-14
On
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Prediction On or Prediction Off
Learning On/Off
(Japanese Only)
Default
Jump
■
Setting
■
On
Setting
Select to keep record or not for entered character
strings by Suggestions.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Learning On or Learning Off
Font Size
Default
■
Large
Setting
Change font size for SMS, S! Mail, or template text;
BSelect Word field and enter text
CSelect Reading field and enter key
characters
DPress w (Save)
available sizes vary.
User Dictionary
(Japanese Only)
Save frequently used words/phrases of up to 20
characters; entries appear in Suggestions when key
characters are entered.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → User dictionary →
New entry
Tip
• To edit User Dictionary entries
a Press c and select Settings → Phone settings →
User dictionary → Edit entry
b Select contents to edit
c Edit a word or readings and press w (Save)
• To delete one item
a Press c and select Settings → Phone settings →
User dictionary → Edit entry
b Highlight item to delete, select Options → Delete
• To delete all items
a Press c and select Settings → Phone settings →
User dictionary → Delete all
b Enter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes
4-15
Entering Text
AIn message text, select Options →
Font Size
Saving to User Dictionary
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Word registration
BUse a to move cursor to the first
character, press c (Start)
To display User Dictionary window for
Entering Text
checking the saved contents, etc.
Press o (UserDic)
CUse a to set the range, press
c (End)
DSelect Reading field and enter
reading
EPress w (Save)
Tip
• When the range containing line break
Character string before line break is saved as the
dictionary word.
• To edit User dictionary
Press o (UserDic) to select start point for Word
registration; operations in "User Dictionary (Japanese
Only)" ( P.4-15) can be performed. Select Edit entry
and registered entries appear.
SMS Templates
Save frequently used words/phrases of up to 70
characters.
APress w (
) and select Templates
→ SMS templates
BSelect Options → Add new
When no SMS templates have been saved
Press w (Add new)
CPress c (Select) and enter text
4-16
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To use an SMS template ( P.4-11)
• To edit an SMS template
a Press w (
) and select Templates → SMS
templates
b Highlight an item to edit and press c (Edit)
c Press c (Select) and edit the text
d Press w (Save)
• To delete an SMS template
a Press w (
) and select Templates → SMS
templates
b Highlight an item to delete, select Options →
Delete → Selected → Yes
To delete all SMS templates, in Step b, select Delete
→ All, enter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes. To delete multiple items, select Delete →
Multiple in Step b, check items to delete, press w
(Delete) and select Yes.
Entering Text
4-17
4-18
Phonebook
Saving to Phonebook
Item
Description
708SC
USIM
Card
Yes
Yes3
Select one of six
icons
Yes
(Six Icons)
No
Phone
Saved with area
Number code
Yes
(5 of up to
40 digits
each)
Yes2 3
Yes
(4 of up to
256
characters
each)
Yes3
(1 address)
Phonebook Entry Items
Save phone numbers, mail addresses, and more for
up to 1,000 entries in Phonebook; USIM Card
Phonebook capacity varies by card. Insert USIM
Single-byte
Reading
characters
Phone
Icon
Card into compatible SoftBank handsets to use
USIM Card Phonebook entries.
Each 708SC Phonebook entry contains the items
Phonebook
listed below.
Item
Description
Entry
a 3-digit number
Number
Name
5-2
Single-/double-byte
characters
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC
USIM
Card
Yes
(000-999)1
Yes
(0000XX)2
Yes (Up to
50
characters)
Yes3
Availability
(Quantity)
Email
Single-byte
alphanumerics
Email
Icon
Select one of three
icons
Yes
No
Categor
Select one of twenty
categories
Yes
Yes2
Caller
ID
Select incoming call
image from Data
Folder
Yes
No
Item
Description
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC
USIM
Card
Yes
Select incoming S!
Message
Mail/SMS ringtone
Notice
from Data Folder
Yes
No
Blood
Type
Select one of four
blood types
Yes
No
Birthday
Enter the party's
date of birth
Yes
No
Enter up to 20
single-byte
Address characters for postal
code and up to 50
for address
Yes
No
Hobby
Up to 100
characters
Yes
No
URL
Up to 100 singlebyte alphanumerics
Yes
(2 URLs)
No
Call
Notice
No
Description
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC
USIM
Card
URL
Icon
Select one of three
icons
Yes
No
Notes
Up to 100
characters
Yes
No
Secret
Mode
Select secret setting
Yes
No
1 Use speed dialing ( P.5-12) to initiate a Voice Call to
phone numbers with memory Nos. 000 to 099 in
Phonebook of handset.
2 The number of items that can be saved varies by the type
of USIM Card.
3 The number of characters that can be saved varies by the
type of USIM Card.
Note
5-3
Phonebook
Select incoming call
ringtone from Data
Folder
Item
• Protect important information
Phonebook entry information may be altered or
deleted when battery is removed or left uncharged
for an extended period. Accidents or malfunctions
may also affect Phonebook entries. Back-up
Phonebook entry information and store separately.
SoftBank is not be liable for damages resulting lost
information.
Adding Entry Items
708SC assigns lowest available Entry Number; edit
as required.
Phonebook Details
Phonebook
ASelect Options → Add to → Phone or
USIM
BEnter additional items as required
*Not available in USIM Card Phonebook.
To change Entry number
Highlight Entry number field and enter a
number
To save Name
aSelect Name field
5-4
bEnter a name
To set Caller ID for a Voice Call or Video
To modify Reading Name
Call*
aSelect Reading Name field
aSelect Caller ID field
bEnter a reading name (use katakana to
bSelect On
organize entries in Phonebook list)
cOpen Data Folder to select an image file, etc.
To save Phone number
To set Call notice for a Voice Call or Video
Highlight Phone number field and enter a
Call*
number
aSelect Call notice field
To set Phone icon
bSelect On
aSelect Phone number field
cOpen Data Folder to select a file
bSelect an icon
To set S! Mail/SMS Notice*
To save Mail address
aSelect Message notice field
aSelect Mail address field
bSelect On
bEnter an address
cSelect sound
cSelect an icon
To save Blood type*
To set Category
aSelect Blood type field
aSelect Category field
bSelect blood Type
bSelect a Category
To save Birthday*
Phonebook
Highlight Birthday field and enter a date
5-5
To save Address*
aSelect Address field
bEnter a postal code
cSelect Address field and enter an address
dPress w (OK)
To save Hobby*
aSelect Hobby field
bEnter text
To save URL*
aSelect URL field
Phonebook
bEnter a URL
cSelect an icon
To save Memo*
aSelect Notes field
bEnter text
To set Secret Mode*
aSelect Secret Mode field
bSelect On
CPress w (Save)
5-6
Tip
• Phone number field characters
Save 0-9, #, *, P (Pause), and + (International Code) in
Phone field. Press * for 1+ seconds to enter P or
press 0 for 1+ seconds to enter +.
• To save after entering a phone number
Alternatively, during a call, select Options → Add to
Phonebook.
a In Standby, enter a phone number
b Select Options → Add to Phonebook → Phone or
USIM
c Select New or Update and select memory location
for saving the information
d Select the phone icon
e Perform Steps 2 and 3
• Synchronizing Phonebook with Samsung PC Studio
The entries with Secret Mode On cannot be
synchronized regardless of Secret Mode settings
(cannot be back-upped to PC).
The entries with Secret Mode changed from Off to On,
cannot be synchronized and deleted immediately after
the Secret Mode settings has been changed and tried
synchronization.
For more information about Samsung PC Studio, see
the User's guide in the attached CD-ROM.
Saving from Call Log Records
Save numbers from Call Log records to new or
existing Phonebook entries.
APress r
FPress w (Save)
Category Settings
Organize Phonebook entries among twenty
Categories.
BUse s to open a Call Log, highlight
a record, select Options → Add to
Phonebook → Phone or USIM
APress c and select Phonebook
CSelect Phonebook entry type
BSelect Options → View from USIM
Select New
To save to an existing entry
CPress w (Search) and select Category
search
aSelect Update
DSelect Options → New category
bOpen the Phonebook entry ( P.5-9)
EEnter a name
DSelect a phone icon
EEnter additional items as required
5-7
Phonebook
To create a new entry
New Category (USIM Card)
Edit Category
To set Category image
Select Category image field then select a file
Customize Category names, add Category image/
from Data Folder
ringtones to appear and sound for incoming calls/
To set incoming call ringtone
messages from Category members.
Select Call notice field then select a file from
APress c and select Phonebook
Data Folder
To select a USIM Card Category
To set incoming S! Mail/SMS notice
After Step 1, select Options → View from USIM
Select Message notice field then select a
Phonebook
BPress w (Search) and select Category
search
CHighlight category to change, select
Options → Category settings
DEdit Category items
To change Category name
Select Category name field and enter a name
5-8
ringtone
To restore Category defaults
Highlight item to restore and press o (Reset)
EPress w (Save)
Tip
• Incoming image & ringtone priority
Images and ringtones set for individual Phonebook
entries take priority over those set for a Category.
Add Member
APress c and select Phonebook
To select Category on USIM Card
After Step 1, select Options → View from USIM
BPress w Search and select Category
search
CSelect Category to which to add
member
Tip
• To delete a member from a Category
Deleting a member from a Category does not affect
member's Phonebook entry.
a Perform Steps 1 and 2 in "Add Member"
b Select Category from which to delete member
c Highlight member to delete, select Options →
Remove → Yes
Using Phonebook
DSelect Options → Add member
Phonebook Search
ECheck the member to add and press
w (Add)
APress d
Phonebook
Calling from Phonebook
If the correct search method appears first
Proceed to Step 2, Part b
To change method from an active search
window
Press c and proceed to Step 2
5-9
BPress w (Search)
To search Phonebook list
aSelect Phonebook list
bUse s to navigate Phonebook list
To search by Mail Address
aSelect Email search
bEnter any part of an mail address
CSelect an entry
To search by Category
To open Entry details
aSelect Category search
Press c (Details/Select)
bSelect Category
To search by name
aSelect Name search
bEnter any part of Name
Phonebook
To search by Reading
aSelect Reading search
bEnter any part of Reading
To search by Entry Number
aSelect Entry No. search
bEnter Entry Number
To search by Phone Number
aSelect Phone No. search
bEnter any part of a phone number
5-10
Tip
• To set Phonebook appearance preference
(Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook)
a Press c and select Settings → Phonebook
settings → View phonebook from
b Select Phone memory or USIM memory and press
c (Save)
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide
Phonebook Secret Mode is set to On, these Phonebook
entries do not appear. To search these entries, set Secret
Mode to Show.
Initiating a Call
ASelect an entry, press c (Details) to
view Details window
Tip
• To place a call from Phonebook list
Highlight an entry, select Options → Voice call or
Video call. When entry contains multiple numbers,
Default Number is dialed if set; otherwise, first number
listed is dialed. If Default Number is Not assigned, Call
window appears; select a number.
Calling from Simple Search and search result
Entry Details
To initiate a Voice Call
Press c or select Options → Voice call
To initiate a Video Call
Select Options → Video call
5-11
Phonebook
BSelect a number and initiate a call
When Simple search is set to On ( P.15-7), enter
numbers to search and display entry name/phone
number; this search for entries starting with Reading
name corresponding to the entered number. Highlight a
phone number, press t or c (Select) → c (Call)
to initiate a Voice Call; select Options → Video call to
call a Video Call.
Calling from phone number search and search
result
Enter 4-digit number to search and display entry name/
phone number; this search for entries contains the
entered number at the first/last part of the entry. When
Simple search is set to On and any entry searched, press
s to switch the search result between phone number
search and Simple search. Highlight a phone number,
press t or c (Select ) → c (Call) to initiate a
Voice Call; select Options → Video call to call a Video
Call.
Phonebook
Calling USIM Card Phonebook
Entries
Use Entry Numbers as shortcuts to call numbers
saved in the first 100 USIM Card Phonebook entries.
AEnter the last two digits of an Entry
Number
BPress #
If the correct entry is not highlighted
Use j to highlight it
5-12
CPress w (Call)
To initiate a Video Call
Press o (V-Call)
Change Search Method
Default
■
Phonebook list
Setting
Set to display specified search window when pressed
d in Standby.
APress c and select Settings →
Phonebook settings → Search type
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
• The contents of search method settings are:
Phonebook list: Press d in Standby, shows list
window.
Other settings: Set each search type window appears.
Speed Dialing
Enter the last two digits of an Entry Number to call
the Voice Call Default Number in Phonebook entries
000 - 099.
AEnter the last two digits of an Entry
Number
BPress c (
Note
• Speed Dialing is invalid for an entry if Voice Call
Default Number ( P.5-14) is set to Not assigned.
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide and Phonebook
Secret Mode is set to On; these Phonebook entry
numbers cannot be used for Speed Dialing.
Phonebook Options
Use the following options in Phonebook List or
Entry details.
• When Simple search is set to On
Enter number to show Simple search result (entry
names and phone numbers) appears. After 5 seconds,
Simple search result disappears.
appeared (Center
Key area) enables Speed dialing.
Item
Phonebook
Tip
Description
Add to1
Start the process of saving a new
entry.
Voice call
Initiate a Voice Call to the
highlighted number or Default
Number ( P.5-10).
Video call
Initiate a Video Call to the
highlighted number or Default
Number ( P.5-10).
5-13
Item
Description
Create message
Open a new message addressed to
the number saved as an entry
( P.17-6).
Send
Send entry as a vFile; select Via
message, to open a new message
with entry attached ( P.17-6), or
Via bluetooth, to send entry to
another device wirelessly ( P.126).
Phonebook
Delete
Delete an entry ( P.5-15).
Save to Data
Folder
Create a vFile and save it to Other
documents in Data Folder.
Copy to USIM/
Copy to phone
( P.5-15)
View from
USIM/View
from Phone1
Toggle between Phonebook and
USIM Phonebook.
International
dial
Add international code and country
code to the number ( P.2-2).
Item
Description
Hide/Show my
ID
Initiate a Voice/Video Call with
your number Shown/Hidden. Select
None to follow Caller ID settings.
Select Show my ID to show your
number. Select Hide my ID to hide
your number.
Print via
Bluetooth
Print highlighted Entry details
(name, phone number information)
using the printer via Bluetooth®
connection.
Memory status1 Check memory usage.
Copy item2
Copy highlighted entry item.
Mark default
number2
( P.5-14)
1 This item does not appear in Entry details.
2 This item does not appear in Phonebook list.
Editing Phonebook
Entries
To search, list or Entry details, see "Phonebook
Search" ( P.5-9).
5-14
When editing Phonebook entries with Phonebook
Secret Mode On, set Secret Mode to Show.
BSelect Options → Mark default
number
CSet or reset options
Edit
AOpen Entry details
To set
BPress w (Edit)
bSelect a phone number or mail address
aSelect Voice call, Video call, or Message
CEdit entry items and press w (Save)
Default Number
Setting
■
■
■
Phonebook
Default
Voice call: First phone number
Video call: First phone number
Message: Not assigned
When a Phonebook entry contains multiple phone
numbers/mail addresses, set calling/messaging
priorities by assigning to Default Number.
Resetting an item changes it to Not assigned.
AOpen Entry details
5-15
To reset
Highlight Voice call, Video call, or Message
and press o (Reset)
DPress w (Save)
Copy to USIM/Copy to Phone
AHighlight entry or open Entry details
BCopy the entry
To copy from Phonebook to USIM Card
Deleting a Single Entry
AHighlight entry or open Entry details
BSelect Options → Delete → Selected
→ Yes
Deleting Multiple Entries at Once
AHighlight entries
Phonebook
Phonebook
To select Phonebook or USIM Card
Select Options → Copy to USIM → Selected or
Phonebook
All → Yes
Select Options → View from Phone or View
To copy from USIM Card Phonebook to
from USIM
Phonebook
Select Options → Copy to phone → Selected or
All
5-16
Deleting Entries
BSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
CCheck an entry to delete
DRepeat Step 3 to check all target
entries
EPress w (Delete) and proceed to
Step 7 when all are not checked
FEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm)
GSelect Yes
My Phonebook Details
Confirm handset phone number. Add your name,
mail address, street address, and other information.
APress c and Press 0
To enter or edit other items
aPress w (Edit)
bEnter or edit items following the same
Delete all Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook
procedures for Phonebook items; when
entries.
finished, then press w (Save)
Phonebook
Deleting All Entries at Once
CEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) → Yes
AHighlight entries
To move between Phonebook and USIM
Card Phonebook
Select Options → View from USIM or View
from Phone
BSelect Options → Delete → All
5-17
Options
Item
Description
Send my
phonebook
details
Send as a vFile; select Via message
to create a message with vFile
attached ( P.17-6), or Via
Bluetooth to send vFile wirelessly
( P.12-6).
Delete
Delete owner info except numbers
on USIM Card.
Save to Data
Folder
Create a vFile and save it to Other
documents in Data Folder.
Phonebook
Copy item
Copy highlighted entry item.
Print via
Bluetooth
Print My phonebook details (name,
phone number information) using
the printer via Bluetooth®
connection.
5-18
5-19
5
Phonebook
5-20
Video Call
Before Using Video Calls
AEnter a phone number
Exchange voice and video via Video Call-compatible
BSelect Options → Video call
3G handsets.
CPress y to end the call
You may choose not to send your own image ( P.6Tip
6).
Video Call Precautions
Video Call
• Calls to incompatible handsets may be disconnected;
charges apply.
• It may be difficult to use Speaker Phone with earpiece
volume raised; lower volume or use Stereo Earphone
Microphone.
• Ambient noise may hamper voice quality; use Stereo
Earphone Microphone.
• Using Speaker Phone in public may disturb other;
please mind your manners.
Initiating a Video Call
Dial directly or from Phonebook entries or Call Log
records.
6-2
• Engaged Video Call Operations ( P.6-3)
When Video Call cannot be connected
Unavailable for a video call... appears; select Options
→ Voice call or Create message to contact the recipient,
or View contact details to open Phonebook. Select Add
to Phonebook to save the receiver's number to
Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook.
Initiating a Call ( P.2-3)
Receiving a Video Call
AWhen 708SC rings/vibrates, press
c (Accept)
Loudspeaker on? appears;
Select Yes or No
Allow own picture to be shown? appears;
Select Yes or No
BPress y to end the call
Tip
• Send Your Image or Substitute Image during a
Video Call
After Step 1, Your Image appears. When confirmation
appears, select Yes or No to send Your Image or
Substitute Image. When Video Call connects Your
Image or Substitute Image appears.
• Engaged Video Call Operations ( P.6-5)
• To adjust ringtone volume
While 708SC is ringing, press n or b.
• When a Stereo Earphone Microphone is connected
Press Stereo Earphone Microphone switch for 1+
seconds to answer video calls. Press for 1+ seconds to
end a Video Call.
Video Call
• To disconnect a Video Call without answering it
Press o (Busy)
• To change or cancel outgoing image
Set 708SC to send Substitute Image beforehand ( P.66).
Alternatively, change to Substitute Image during a call
( P.6-6).
6-3
Engaged Video Call
Operations
Perform operations from Video Call Menu or
Options.
: Freeze or unfreeze outgoing image
(Blue)/
(Gray): Toggle Your Image and
Substitute Image
: Freeze or unfreeze incoming image
: Flip image
相田名都
￥ １４４
００：００：００
終了
オフ゜ション
ADuring Video Calls, select Video Call
Menu or Options to adjust Video Call
settings
To toggle Speaker Phone off/on
and press c
Video Call
aLarge Display (Normally, the other party's image)
Highlight
bSmall Display (Normally, your image)
To select incoming image size
cThe other party's name or phone number
Highlight
dCall duration
To freeze or unfreeze outgoing image
eMeaning of the icon at cursor position
fVideo Call Menu Icons
: Toggle Speaker Phone Off/On
: Toggle Incoming Image Size
6-4
Highlight
and press c to select an item
and press c
To toggle Your Image and Substitute Image
Highlight
(Blue/Gray) and press c
To freeze or unfreeze incoming image
Highlight
and press c
To flip outgoing image
Highlight
and press c
To cancel Your Image/mic/key tones
aSelect Options → Mute
bCheck item(s) to cancel and press w (Save)
When Camera (Your Image) is canceled,
Substitute Image is sent.
Tip
• To adjust earpiece volume
Press j during a Video Call.
• To enlarge or reduce outgoing image
Press n or b during a Video Call.
• When outgoing image is canceled
708SC send caller Substitute Image.
To adjust outgoing image appearance/quality
aSelect Options → Display options → Effects
Engaged Video Call Options
or Quality
Item
bHighlight an item and press c
To adjust outgoing image brightness
Brightness
bUse s to adjust brightness
Toggle Speaker Phone off/on
( P.6-4).
Mute
Cancel sending outgoing image/
mic/key tones ( P.6-4).
Display options
Adjust outgoing image
appearance/quality ( P.6-4).
Settings
Select Video Call settings ( P.65).
Phonebook
Open Phonebook Search
window.
6-5
Video Call
aSelect Options → Display options →
Description
Normal/Speaker on
Item
Description
Add to Phonebook
Save number to Phonebook or
USIM Card Phonebook ( P.57).
Send DTMF
Send push tones.
Memo
Create and save text memos
( P.14-10).
Details
Open Phonebook Entry details.
Switch to headset/
Switch to phone
Appears when Bluetooth®compatible headset is in use.
Select headset or phone
(handset).
Video Call Settings
Video Call
Sending Your Image
Default
■
Always ask
Setting
When Always ask is set, Choose between Your Image
or Substitute Image as outgoing image each time a
Video Call is received.
6-6
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Video call → Show my
picture
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Selecting a Substitute Image
Default
■
Camera Off
Setting
Select an image to use as the outgoing image (in
place of Your Image).
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Video call → Select still
picture
BPress c (Change)
COpen Data Folder, select a file and
press c (Save)
Tip
Tip
• To restore Substitute Image to its default
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Select any image file in Data Folder → Options →
Reset
Retry Settings
Default
■
Always ask
Setting
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings→ Video call → Retry with
Voice Mute
Default
■
Off
Setting
Set Voice mute to On to answer Video Calls with no
sound sending to caller.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Video call → Voice mute
BSelect On and press c (Save)
6-7
Video Call
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
• The contents of Retry with are:
Always ask: Select an action from Options.
Voice call: Choose whether or not to redial number as a
Voice Call.
Messages: Choose whether or not to create a message.
None: Return to Standby after a failed Video Call.
Automatic retry option changes by the setting.
Tip
• To send sound
a During a Video Call, select Options → Mute
b Uncheck Voice
c Press w (Save)
Video Call
6-8
6-9
Mobile Camera
Before Using Mobile
Camera
708SC Camera
708SC has rotating camera. Capture still images/
Capture still images in JPEG format or video in 3GP
videos with rotating Camera lens inwards/outwards
format.
to suit various situations. Images/videos may appear
upside down on Display by Camera lens direction.
Mobile Camera Precautions
• Use a dry soft cloth to remove debris from camera
lens.
Use n to display images/videos in the normal
position.
• Avoid camera shake; hold 708SC steady or place it
on a stable surface and use Timer.
• Mobile Camera employs high precision
technology, however, some pixels may seem
brighter or darker than others.
Mobile Camera
• Leaving 708SC in a hot place for an extended
period before image capture/save may affect image
quality.
• Exposing camera lens to direct sunlight may affect
color filter.
7-2
Lens outwards
Lens inwards
c White Balance
Using Display as Viewfinder
bc
: Auto
: Incandescent
bchi
: Fine
: Fluorescent
: Cloudy
d Mode
No display : Single shot
: Multi-shot (6 shots)
: Multi-shot (15 shots)
: Mosaic shot (2 x 2)
: Multi-shot (9 shots)
: Mosaic shot (3 x 3)
e Timer (When set)
f Display Position (Top & Bottom)
Video Viewfinder
Camera Viewfinder
: Normal display when lens outwards
: Normal display when lens inwards
a Size
b Quality
: Superfine
: Normal
: Economy
: Fine
: Low
g Display Position (Left & Right)
: Normal image
: Mirror image
Mobile Camera
: 3 seconds
: 5 seconds
: 10 seconds
h Audio Recording
: On
: Off
i Recording Time
: Limit for S! Mail : 10 seconds
: 30 seconds
: Normal recording
7-3
j Elapsed Recording Time
Mode
k Total Data Size/Recording Time
l Progress Bar
Capturing a Still Image
Camera Mode
Select Single shot to capture single images, Multishot
or Mosaic shot to capture multiple images. Save
images in Pictures.
Mode
Description
Image size
Mobile Camera
Single shot
1600 x 1200
Capture single images, select 1280 x 960
640 x 480
size for purpose; attach
320 x 240
images to S! Mail, save as
240 x 320
Wallpaper, etc.
240 x 192
Multi-shot
Press shutter once to capture
6, 9 or 15 sequential images.
7-4
320 x 240
Description
Capture multiple images, one
at a time; 708SC
automatically combines
Mosaic shot
single images (4 for
2 x 2 or 9 for 3 x 3) into one
composite image.
Image size
240 x 192
Tip
• When using Single shot mode with a flame
Image size is automatically adjusted to 240 x 192.
Capturing Still Images
Single Shot
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change to Camera mode
BSelect Options → Shooting mode →
Single shot → Take & save
To save captured images without review
Select Automatic save
CSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-6)
Use r or l to lighten or darken image
EPress c (Take)
To cancel the image and capture another
Press w (Back)
Tip
• To activate/adjust Timer in image preview
Press 5 to toggle 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds,
and Off.
• To adjust viewfinder in image preview
Press # to toggle Full screen, Actual ratio, Full
screen without indicator, and Full screen with grid.
• To send an image via S! Mail or Bluetooth®
a After Step 5, press c (Send) and select send
medium
b Send image ( P.12-6, 17-6)
Mobile Camera
DPreview image on Display
Adjust brightness
Zoom image preview in/out (invalid for 1600
x 1200)
Use u or d to zoom out or in
7-5
Preview Options
Review Options
Available options may vary by mode and other settings.
Mobile Camera
7-6
Item
Description
Item
Description
Delete
Delete the last image captured.
Shooting mode
Select Shooting mode and save
setting for Single shot, or image
count for Multi-shot or Mosaic shot
( P.7-5, 7-9).
Set as
Set image for Wallpaper,
Phonebook entries, or Substitute
Image.
Edit photo
Edit an image in Pictures folder
( P.7-15).
Effects
Select Black & White, Sepia or
Negative effects filters. When an
effect is active, select None to
cancel.
Dynamic Effect
Create Flash images using Still
images ( P.7-19).
Add a frame to image in Single shot
mode.
Rename
Change file name.
Frames
mPostcard
Create a mobile postcard ( P.7-7).
Timer
Activate self-timer ( P.7-5).
Go to photos
Open Pictures folder.
Camera settings
Select image size, image quality,
etc. ( P.7-13).
Camera
shortcuts
Open a function shortcuts graphic
( P.7-10).
Go to photos
Open Pictures folder.
Lock/Unlock
Set/release file protection.
Details
Confirm file size or format.
Mobile Postcard
Use Single shot, Multi-shot, or Mosaic shot images.
EPress c (Merge) and check the
merged result
This function renders one of two images as line art,
To change image
merging it with the other to create a stamped
aPress C
photograph.
bHighlight image to change, select Options →
ACapture an image ( P.7-5, 7-8)
BSelect Options → mPostcard
CPress c (Add)
DAdd a second image
To select a still image from Data Folder
aSelect Open
To capture an image
aSelect Take photo
bPress c (Take)
cPress c (Add)
To swap image positions
aPress C
bSelect Options → Swap image
cPerform Step 5
FTo edit line art, press o (Edit)
To change line art position
aSelect Options → Move
Mobile Camera
bOpen Data Folder and select an image file
Change image
cRepeat Steps 4 and 5
bUse a to move image and press w
(Done)
To change line art size
aSelect Options → Size
7-7
bUse j to adjust image and press w
(Done)
To rotate line art
aSelect Options → Rotate
bUse s to rotate image and press w
(Done)
To change line art color
aSelect Options → Change colour
bUse s to select color and press w (Done)
To adjust line art shadow
aSelect Options → Shadow on or Shadow off
bPress w (Done)
Mobile Camera
GPress w (Save) and enter a file
name
To save and send image
aPress c (S & S)
bSelect medium and send ( P.12-6, 17-6)
7-8
Multi Shot
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change Camera mode
BSelect Options → Shooting mode →
Multi-shot and select the number of
images to capture
CSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-6)
DPreview image on Display
Zoom in/out
Use u or d to enlarge or reduce image
Adjust brightness
Use r or l to lighten or darken image
EPress c (Take)
FView captured still image(s)
DPreview image on Display
To view still images individually
Zoom in/out
aHighlight the image and press c (View)
Use u or d to zoom in or out
bPress C
Adjust brightness
To retake a still image
Press w (Back)
Mosaic Shot
APress e
Use r or l to brighten or darken image
EPress c (Take) for each image
FView captured still images
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change Camera mode
CSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-6)
Mosaic Mode (2 x 2)
Mobile Camera
BSelect Options → Shooting mode →
Mosaic shot to select the number of
images to capture
To retake an image
Press w (Back)
7-9
Shortcut Key Operations
Key
Change the settings by pressing the key assigned to
each item.
Available shortcuts vary by mode or setting status.
Key
Item
1 Size
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960,
640 x 480, 320 x 240,
240 x 320, 240 x 192
2 Quality
Superfine, Fine, Normal,
Low, Economy
Shooting
mode
Single shot, Multi-shot (6, 9,
15 shots), Mosaic shot (2 x 2,
3 x 3)
Mobile Camera
5 Timer
3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10
seconds
6 Frames
Select from 9 types
7 Effects
Black & White, Sepia,
Negative
0 Photo album
# Screen mode
Description
Auto, Fine, Cloudy,
4 White balance
Incandescent, Fluorescent
Item
Description
Toggle Full screen, Actual
ratio, Full screen without
indicator, Full screen with
grid
Mode switch
Vertical
inverse
Horizontal
inverse
Zoom
Brightness
Capturing Video
Video Mode
Capture videos suitable for attaching to mail or
saving as a record.
Alternatively, capture videos without sound.
Captured video is saved in 3GP format to the Videos
folder of Data Folder.
7-10
Capturing Video
APress e
In Camera mode
Press w (Videos) to open Video mode
BSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-11)
CPreview image on Display
Zoom in/out
Use u or d to enlarge or reduce image
FPress c (Play) to view captured
video
To continue capturing
Press w (Back)
Tip
• To activate/adjust Timer when capturing
In image preview, press 5 to toggle 3 seconds, 5
seconds, 10 seconds, Off.
Preview Options
Item
Use r or l to lighten or darken image
Effects
EPress c (Save) and end
Timer
Activate self-timer ( P.7-11).
After recording time elapses
Capturing automatically ends and captured
video is saved automatically.
Go to videos
Open Videos folder.
Video settings
Select image size, image quality,
etc. ( P.7-14).
Camcorder
shortcuts
Open a function shortcuts graphic
( P.7-12).
7-11
Mobile Camera
DPress c (Record)
Description
Select Black & White, Sepia, or
Negative effects filters. When an
effect is active, select None to
cancel.
Adjust brightness
Review Options
Key
Item
Description
Item
Description
Quality
Fine, Normal, Low,
Economy
Shooting time
Limit for S! Mail, 10
seconds, 30 seconds,
Normal recording
Mobile Camera
Edit
Edit Video files in Data Folder (P.717).
Resolution
Select video display size while
playing or paused.
Send
Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
White balance
Auto, Fine, Cloudy,
Incandescent, Fluorescent
Set as
Set captured videos as Voice
ringtone or Video ringtone.
Timer
3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10
seconds
Delete
Delete the last video captured.
Change file name.
Audio
recording
On, Off
Rename
Go to videos
Open Videos folder.
Effects
Lock/Unlock
Set/release file protection.
Black & White, Sepia,
Negative
Details
Confirm file size or format.
Record album
Mode switch
Vertical
inverse
Horizontal
inverse
Shortcut Key Operations
Change the settings by pressing the key assigned to
each item.
Key
7-12
Item
Size
Description
320 x 240, 176 x 144,
128 x 96
Zoom
Brightness
Mobile Camera Settings
To set image size
aSelect Size
Make settings related to image capturing including
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
the size, image quality, save location, etc. of images.
To set image quality
aSelect Quality
Camera Settings
Default
Setting
Size: 240 x 320 ■ Quality: Normal
■ Viewfinder: Full screen
■ Shutter sound: Shutter 1
■ Multi-shot speed: High
■ Single shot mode: Take & save
■ White balance: Auto
■ Default name: Photo
■
APress e
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set Viewfinder
aSelect Viewfinder
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set the shutter sound
aSelect Shutter sound
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set sequential shot speed
aSelect Multi-shot speed
Press w (Photos) to change to Camera mode
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
BSelect Options → Camera settings
To set the Single shot mode
CSelect an item and perform
operations to set
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Mobile Camera
In Video mode
aSelect Single shot mode
7-13
To set white balance
aSelect White balance
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set file name
aSelect Default name
bEnter file name
Video Settings
Default
Setting
Recording time: Limit for S! Mail
■ Size: 176 x 144
■ Quality: Economy ■ Audio recording:
On
■ Default name: Video
■
APress e
Mobile Camera
In Camera mode
Press w (Videos) to change to Video mode
BSelect Options → Video settings
7-14
CSelect an item and adjust settings
To set duration
aSelect Recording time
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set size
aSelect Size
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set image quality
aSelect Quality
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set voice recording
aSelect Audio recording
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set file name
aSelect Default name
bEnter file name
Tip
• Video recording time
When the recording time is set to Normal recording,
video with maximum of approximately one hour can be
recorded in ordinary mode.
• When Recording time is set to Limit for S! Mail
Unable to set Size with 320 x 240; Quality is
automatically set to Economy, and cannot be changed.
Viewing Images
View images/video clips saved in Data Folder.
Viewing Still Images
APress e
Press w (Photos) to change Camera mode
BSelect Options → Go to photos
CHighlight a file and press c (View)
APress e
In Camera mode
Press w (Videos) to change to Video mode
BSelect Options → Go to videos
CHighlight and select a file and press
c (Play)
Editing Still Images
Edit image files saved in Data Folder.
APress c, select Data folder and
select an image to edit
BHighlight a file and press c (View)
CPress c (Edit)
7-15
Mobile Camera
In Video mode
Viewing Videos
DEdit using Options
cPress w (Done)
aSelect Resize
To add a frame
bSelect the setting
aSelect Frames
cEnter Width or Height (If Customise is
selected)
cPress w (Done)
To add clip art to an image
To add effects to an image
aSelect Cliparts
aSelect Effects
bSelect a piece of clip art to add to an image
cPress w (Done)
To add blur or correct red-eye
aSelect Partial effects → Partial blur or
Mobile Camera
Redeye repair
bSelect Options and select the suitable
operation
cPress w (Done)
To adjust an image
aSelect Adjust → Brightness/Contrast/Colour
7-16
bUse s to select a frame
dPress w (Done)
bSelect the setting
bAdjust the image
To change the size of an image
cSelect Options → Size and use j to adjust
the clip art size
dSelect Options → Rotate and use s to turn
the clip art
eSelect Options → Move and use a to move
the clip art
fPress w (Done)
To add text to image (320 x 240 or above)
aSelect Insert text
bEnter text
cSelect Options → Size and use j to adjust
the text size
dSelect Options → Rotate and use s to turn
the text
eSelect Options → Font size → Large/
Normal/Small
fSelect Options → Colour and use a to
adjust the text color
gPress w (Done)
To rotate image
aSelect Rotate
bSelect Options → Size and use j to adjust
the trimming size
cSelect Options → Shape and use s to
select the trimming shape
dSelect Options → Move and use a to
adjust the trimming position
eSelect Options → Crop
fPress w (Done)
EPress c (Save)
FEnter a name for the image
bSelect 90° R or 90° L
cPress w (Done)
Editing Videos
Edit Video files in Data Folder.
aSelect Flip
APress c, and select Data Folder →
Videos
bSelect Vertically or Horizontally
cPress w (Done)
To crop image
aSelect Crop
BHighlight a file, select Options → Edit
CEdit using Options
7-17
Mobile Camera
To flip image
To cut video
aSelect Cut
bPress c (Play)
cPress w (Start) at the start point
dPress w (End) at the End point
eTo cancel and retry, press o (Reset) and
repeat b to d
fPress w (Done)
To merge multiple videos
aSelect Merge
bCheck files to merge (Up to ten files)
cRepeat b to check all target files
dPress w (Done)
ePress c (Merge)
Mobile Camera
To replace sound from other video/sound
aSelect Replace sound → From other video or
From other sound
bPress c (Open)
cSelect a file and press w (Done)
7-18
DPress c (Save)
EEnter a file name
Tip
• To confirm video before editing
Press w (Preview)
• To add files to merge videos
a After e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple videos,"
select Options → Add
b Perform b to e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple
videos"
• To delete the file order for merging
a After e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple videos,"
use s to highlight the file to delete
b Select Options → Delete → Yes
• To change the file order for merging
a After e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple videos,"
use s to highlight the file to move
b Select Options → Change order
c Use s to highlight a personal folder or a file,
highlight the file and press c
cSelect Options → Size, use j to adjust the
Create Flash®
size and press w (Done)
Create Flash® images using still images saved in
Pictures folder, already created Flash® images saved
in Other documents folder, or still images previewed
immediately after shooting; newly created Flash
®
dSelect Options → Rotate and use s to
adjust the angle as required
eUse a to adjust the position and w
(Done)
images are saved to Other documents folder in Data
fRepeat a to e to add more icons
Folder.
To add text to image
APress c and Camera → Dynamic
effect list
aSelect
BSelect files
To add frame to image
aSelect
(Frame)
bSelect the frame
To add icon to image
aSelect
(Icon)
cSelect Options → Font size and adjust the
size as required, and press w (Done)
dSelect Options → Font color and use s to
adjust the color as required, and press w
(Done)
Mobile Camera
CPerform creation operations
(Text)
bEnter text
eUse a to adjust the position and w
(Done)
fUse s to change scroll direction and press
w (Done)
bSelect the icon
7-19
gTo add more text, select
(Text), press
c (Insert) and repeat b to g
To add watch on image
aSelect
(Watch)
bSelect the watch
cPress w (Done)
To reset image during editing
aSelect
(Reset)
bSelect Yes
DPress w (Save)
EEnter an image name
Tip
• To delete added frame/watch
a After Step 2, select
(Frame) or
b Press w (Delete)
(Watch)
Mobile Camera
• To delete added icon(s)/text(s)
a After Step 2, select
(Icon) or
(Text)
b Use s to highlight more icons/texts to delete
c Press w (Delete)
d Press c (Done)
• Available icon/text to add
Up to 5 icons/texts can be added.
7-20
• To create Flash® images using images already saved
in Data Folder
a Highlight image saved in Data Folder and select
Options → Dynamic Effect
b Perform Steps 1 to 3 ( P.7-19) in "Create Flash®"
Note
BEnter an address, subject, text, etc.,
and send
Tip
• To send a still image or video via Bluetooth®
Select Via bluetooth in Step 1 ( P.12-6).
• Created Flash® images cannot be sent as message.
Attaching Images to a
Message
Attach captured image or recorded video and send
via S! Mail.
AAfter capturing, press c (Send) →
As message
Mobile Camera
To send video
In image review, select Options → Send → As
message
7-21
7-22
Display Settings
Standby Display Settings
Wallpaper
Default
■
Pictures
Setting
Set Pictures that displays the saved still images or
animations, or Photo slide that displays still images
one by one, or mPet world image. Set to hide still
Display Settings
image.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Wallpaper
BPerform operations to set
To change settings
Select Pictures, Photo slide, mPet world image,
or None
To change the image of Pictures
aHighlight Pictures and press w (Edit)
8-2
bSelect the save location of files and select a
file
cPress c (Set)
To set/edit the image of Photo slide
aSelect Photo slide and press w (Edit)
bPerform Steps 2 to 4 in "Setting Photo Slide"
( P.8-2) or perform Steps 2 and 3 in "Editing
Photo Slide" ( P.8-3)
CPress c (Save)
Tip
Note
• With no pet selected in mPet, mPet world image
cannot be set as Wallpaper.
CSelect save location for the file, check
the image to set and press w (Done)
To see preview
aPress w (Preview) and select Yes
(Cropping the left and the right) or No
(Displaying in the original horizontal and
vertical ratio)
bPress C to close the preview
Display Settings
• After setting mPet
mPet operations are enabled ( P.24-5). Press y to
show Standby as usual; various operations can be
performed.
BPress c (Add)
To set effect
aUse j to highlight Effect field
bUse s to toggle setting
To change the switching duration per still
image
aUse j to highlight Duration field
Photo Slide
APress c and select Tools → Photo
slide
bUse s to highlight Effect field
DPress c (Set) and select Yes (crop
sides) or No (show full image)
8-3
To delete a still image
Tip
• To adjust slide size
To display large in the window, select Yes in Step 4. To
display in the original horizontal and vertical ratio,
select No.
Editing Photo Slide
APress c and select Tools → Photo
slide
Display Settings
BPerform editing operations
To edit still images
aSelect Options → Replace
bCheck a still image to set and press w
(Done)
Highlight the still image to delete, select
Options → Delete → Yes
To add a still image
aHighlight any part where a still image is not
set and press o (Add)
bCheck a still image to add and press w
(Done)
CPress c (Set) and select Yes or No
Tip
• To adjust slide size
To display large in the window, select Yes in Step 3. To
display in the original horizontal and vertical ratio,
select No.
To change order of still images
aHighlight the still images to change order,
select Options → Change Order
bUse a to change order and press c
(Save)
8-4
Clock Display
Default
Setting
■
Off
In Standby, select Digital clock, Dual clock, and
Calendar to display. In Standby, hiding clock is also
BSelect settings
Digital clock
available.
aSelect Digital clock
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Clock display
bPress w (Edit) and use s to select clock
type
cPress c
Dual clock
aSelect Dual clock
bPress w (Edit)
To hide clock
Display Settings
cPerform Step 3 in "Changing Home Time
Select Off
Zone" ( P.1-22)
To display calendar
Select Calendar
CPress c (Save)
8-5
Tip
• When Dual clock is set
In Standby, two types of clock appear. Upper clock
indicates time of the district set by "Changing Home
Time Zone" ( P.1-22). Bottom clock indicates time of
the district set by "Dual clock."
Menu Display
Menu Style
Default
■
Black
Setting
Operator Name
Change Display type of menu list (Except Yahoo!
Keitai menu).
Default
■
Off
Setting
Display Settings
In Standby, show or hide operator name.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Operator name
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Main menu style
BPerform operations to set
To set Bicycle
aSelect Bicycle
bUse s to change the type
cPress d and Use s to change seasons
To set Amoeba or Slider
aSelect Amoeba or Slider
bUse s to change the type
8-6
To set Black
Proceed to Step 4
CPress c
DPress w (Save)
Popup Menu
Default
■
Off
Setting
Tip
• When you highlight a middle item that has no small
item
Menu balloons are not displayed. They are not
displayed in Alarms in Tool Menu either.
List Font Size
Default
■
Large
Setting
Set main menu item font size.
highlighting a medium item of a menu.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → List font size
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Popup menu
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Display Settings
Set whether to display minor items in balloon when
8-7
Zoom List
Default
■
Off
Setting
Set whether to enlarge highlighted item of a menu in
selection display.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Zoom list
Display Settings
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
• Applicable range of the zoom list setting
Zoom list setting is applied to the third layer menu and
lower. For example, in a case you select Settings →
Call settings → Voice call → Diverts, the menu Voice
call and lower menus are zoomed.
Backlight Brightness &
Duration
Adjusting Display Brightness
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Brightness
BUse a to adjust brightness and
press c (Save)
Backlight Duration
Default
■
On: 15 seconds
■
Dim: 5 seconds
Setting
Set Display backlight lighting time and make display
settings. Display becomes dimmer when the time set
in On has elapsed and Display goes off when the
time set in Dim has elapsed.
8-8
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Backlight time
BSelect an item and make settings
To set the time to light brightly
aSelect On field
bSelect the time to set and press c
Tip
• The contents of Sub LCD light are:
On: Turn on for 3 seconds after closing 708SC, then
the bottom part of Sub LCD turns off.
Power saving mode: Turn on for 3 seconds after
closing 708SC, then turns off.
Off: Always off.
Sub LCD always turns off while 708SC is opened.
To set the time till Display goes off
aSelect Dim field
CPress w (Save)
Dialing Display
Serif, alternatively, change the font size, color, and/or
Display Settings
bSelect the time to set and press c
background color.
Default
■
Font type: Normal
Setting
Change Display to appear when dialing in Standby
Sub LCD Light
Default
■
Power saving mode
Setting
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Sub LCD light
mode. When character type is set to either Normal or
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Dialling display
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
8-9
BSelect an item and make settings
To set font type
Greeting Messages
aSelect Font type
Default
bUse s to switch font type
Setting
■
■
Main LCD: No entry
Sub LCD: No entry
To set the font size
aSelect Font size
Change power on message for Display.
bUse s to select the size
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings → Greeting message
To set font color
aSelect Font colour
Display Settings
bUse s to select the setting
aSelect Background colour
cUse u to move cursor to Color selection
field and use s to select a color (For
Monochrome only)
To set background color
bUse s to select the color
CPress c (Save)
8-10
→ Main LCD or Sub LCD
BEdit power on message text
Display Language
Default
■
日本語 (Japanese)
Setting
Set 708SC user interface to appear in English,
Japanese, or Korean.
APress c and select 設定 → 一般設定
→ Language or 言語選択
Display Settings
BSelect English and press c (保存/
Save/
8-11
Display Settings
8-12
Sound Settings
Changing Profile Settings
Change 708SC incoming transmission response by
Sound Settings
profile.
In Car Profile, select a different method to answer
calls.
AIn Standby, press * for 1+
seconds
BHighlight a profile and press w
(Edit)
To set Ringtone volume
aSelect Ringtone volume and select item to set
bUse s to adjust volume
cPress w (Play) to check the volume and
press c
dPress w (Save)
To set ringtone for Voice/Video Call
9-2
aSelect Ringtone and select Voice call or
Video call
bSelect the save location for files
cHighlight a melody, select Options → Play
To make sound effect
dPress o (Select)
aSelect Phone sounds
ePress w (Save)
bCheck an item to set and press w (Save)
To set ringtone for S! Mail/SMS
To set key tone
aSelect Ringtone and select Messages
aSelect Key tones
Sound Settings
bSelect the setting
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
cPress w (Play) to check the ringtone and
To set the answering method (Car Profile
press c
dPress w (Save)
To set vibrator
only)
aSelect Call answer mode
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
aSelect Vibration and select the items
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set ringtone duration for S! Mail/SMS
aSelect Message ringtone duration
bEnter duration and press c
To set sound effect or key tone volume
aSelect Key tone volume
bUse s to adjust the volume and press
c (Save)
9-3
Tip
Sound Settings
• Ringtone volume
Select
to adjust volume step by step. Ringtone
volume become louder gradually.
• Acoustic shock
Setting Acoustic shock function On, even with high
Ringtone volume for Voice Call/Video Call, the 708SC
rings at Level 1 volume for the first two seconds, then
at the set volume.
• Incoming call answering mode in Car Profile
With Any key set, answer an incoming call with any
key except w , o , y , or Side Key n or b.
With Automatic set, automatically answer it and talk
with the speaker without performing key operations.
• To set the time (seconds) to answer automatically in
Car Profile
After b in "To set the answering method" in Step 2,
select Automatic, press w (Edit), select the setting
and press c to set the answering method.
• To set a ringtone after recording with Voice
recorder
After b in "To set ringtone" in Step 2, select amr file.
• To adjust the volume while 708SC rings
Press Side Key n or b while 708SC rings.
9-4
• To set notification by display indicator only (Mute)
To set receiving notifications (for incoming calls/
received messages) by display indicator only, mute
Ringtone volume and set Vibration Off; 708SC shows
mute indicator ( ).
• To change ringtone title for S! Mail/SMS
a After b in "To set ringtone for S! Mail/SMS" in
Step 2, highlight Data Folder and press o
(Change)
b Select location to save the file
c Highlight the file, select Options → Play
d Press o (Select)
e Press w (Save)
• To adjust the key tone volume in Standby
In Standby, press Side Key n or b.
Sound settings in Settings
Sound settings in Settings is a menu for changing the
settings of Normal Profile. Other mode settings cannot
be changed.
Profile settings
Available items vary by each Mode. The defaults are as listed below.
−: Setting deactivated
Normal
Manner
Car
Meeting
Outdoor
Ringtone volume
Voice call
Level 4
−
Level 4
Off
Level 5
Video call
Level 4
−
Level 4
Off
Level 5
Messages
Level 4
−
Level 4
Off
Level 5
Voice call
03 acapella.mmf
−
03 acapella.mmf
03 acapella.mmf
03 acapella.mmf
Video call
Techno
Dance.mp4
−
Techno
Dance.mp4
Techno
Dance.mp4
Techno
Dance.mp4
Messages
Pure
−
Pure
Pure
Pure
Ringtone
Vibration
Voice call
On
On
On
On
On
Video call
On
On
On
On
On
Messages
On
On
On
On
On
Sound Settings
Item
Profile
9-5
Item
Profile
Normal
Manner
Car
Meeting
Outdoor
Ringtone duration
Sound Settings
Messages
9-6
5 Seconds
Key tone volume
Level 2
Phone sounds
Several tones On
Key tones
Xylophone
Call answer mode
−
Answer machine
−
5 Seconds
5 Seconds
Level 4
Off
Level 5
Several tones On
Alerts on call
Several tones On
−
Xylophone
Xylophone
Xylophone
−
Normal
−
−
Alerts on call
On
−
5 Seconds
−
−
−
−
Phone sounds setup items
Item
Available items vary by each Mode. The volume of
these sounds follows the Key tone volume settings.
Description
All
Check/uncheck all of the effect
sound items.
Popup box
alerts
Generate sound when a
confirmation or warning message
appears.
Minute minder
Generate sound at approximately
every minute during a call.
Call connect
tone
When a call is initiated, the call is
connected before the ringtone
sounds on other party's handset and
you will be notified with a tone that
the other party will be called from
now.
Call end tone
Generate sound at the end of a call.
Power on
Generate sound when the power is
turned on.
Open/close
folder
Generate sound when opening or
closing handset.
Alerts on call
9-7
Sound Settings
Item
Description
Generate sound when alarm is
activated or mail is received during
a call.
9-8
Media Player
Before Using Media
Player
10
Play sound or video files saved in Data Folder or
stream online media.
Media Player
• From Music or Video menu, select Download
music or Download videos, to access Yahoo! Keitai
and download media files.
• Hear sound not only from the speaker, but also
using the stereo earphone microphone. Insert the
plug as shown in the figure below. When using the
speaker, unplug the stereo earphone microphone
from handset.
Left
Stereo
Earphone
Charger
10-2
Right
• Use the stereo earphone microphone not only for
listening to music but also for initiating voice calls.
When 708SC rings/vibrates while playing music
using a stereo earphone microphone, press the
switch on the stereo earphone microphone for 1+
seconds to answer the call.
Playable File Type
Player
File (Extension)
Music
MPEG4 Audio (mp4, aac, 3gp (Sound
only))
Video
MPEG4 (mp4, 3gp)
Tip
• Other restrictions
Files other than described above saved in Sounds &
Ringtones in Data Folder are not playable with Media
Player. To play these files, select directly from Sounds
& Ringtones folder in Data Folder.
Playing Music
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
CPress c (Play)
Ｎａｔｓｕ Ａｉｄａ−Ｅｖｅｎｉｎｇ Ｗａｌｔｚ
再生
一時停止
To select from All music
Select All music and highlight the file
To select from Recent music
Select Recent music and highlight the file
To select from Most played music
オフ゜ション
10
Melody Player Window
a Artist's name and title (File name when the music
title information is unknown)
b Skin
Select Most played music and highlight the file
c Status : PLAY／PAUSE／STOP
To playback using Playlist ( P.10-7)
d Repeat mode
(Off)／
(One)／
(Shuffle)／
(All)
e File number/Total number of files
f Playing volume
g Total playing time
h Elapsed playing time
i Progress bar
10-3
Media Player
BPerform file selection operations
Tip
10
• To end the playback and return to Options
Press C. If you press C while Options
appearing/operating Options; Options closes/returns to
the previous menu.
Media Player
• If there is an incoming call while playing
The play pauses and a ringtone sounds. After the call is
ended, Media player continues to pause the playback.
• If Message is received while playing
or
appears on the top of Display and 708SC
vibrates to notify you.
• When the time set for alarm has come while playing
Playing pauses, Alarm sounds and alarm details
appears. Press any key to stop Alarm sound and restart
playing. Press any key again to restore Media Player
display.
• To set melody file as Ringtone/Alert tone
While a file is highlighted or playing is paused or
stopped, press w (Set as) and choose how to use the
file. However, a file that cannot be set to be a ringtone
will not be set a ringtone.
• To use another function while listening to music
Use Switch Bar ( P.1-25).
10-4
All music
All playable files by Media Player's Music function
appear. Up to 9999 files can be listed.
Download music
Use Download music as shortcut to a download site.
Select to connect to a download site on the internet.
Music search
Music search of Media Player is a shortcut to a music
search site Music search. It allows you to search for
music by music category or keyword.
Recent music/Most played music
Recent music shows playback record in recent days. The
most recent played file appears on top of the list. Most
played music shows frequently played files record. The
most frequent played file appears on top of the list. Up
to 100 records can be saved.
Player Window & List Options
Item
Available items vary by file type, etc.
Item
Description
Description
Delete
Delete a highlighted file or all
files.
Change file name.
Send
Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
Rename
Lock/Unlock
Set/release file protection.
Details
Confirm file size, etc.
Add
Add files to Playlist. Select
Playlist to add all files contained
in another Playlist. Select Files to
add selected files to Playlist.
Stop
Stop playing.
Play via
Playback music files. When
Playback display, select Phone to
sound from speaker. Select A/V
headset to sound from speaker or
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) ( P.127).
Transfer to A/V
headset/Transfer
to Phone
Toggle sound output between
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) and Phone
( P.12-7).
Download
content key
Purchase or acquire Content Key.
Change order of files in Playlist.
View bookmark
Access a page containing a
streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Add to playlist
Files in All music are added to Play
List. Choose Selected file to add
highlighted file, or Multiple file to
add multiple files to Playlist.
Play by
Play tracks by album, artist or
genre.
Create playlist
Create new Playlist ( P.10-6).
Rename
Change Playlist name.
Open playlist
Open Playlist.
10-5
Media Player
Move track in
playlist
10
Item
Player settings
Description
Select settings related to Media
Player ( P.10-7).
Tip
• With Transfer to A/V headset is set
Raise/lower volume from A/V headset. 708SC cannot
be used to raise/lower volume.
10
Media Player
Playing Melodies Using a
Playlist
Create Playlist
Create a maximum of 20 Playlists, each containing
up to 100 files.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options → Create playlist
CEnter Playlist name
DSelect the created Playlist
ESelect Options → Add → Files
10-6
FCheck every file to save and press
w (Save)
Tip
• To change the name of Playlist
a Highlight Playlist, select Options → Rename
b Enter Playlist name
• To delete selected Playlist
Highlight Playlist, select Options → Delete →
Selected → Yes
• To delete all Playlists
a Highlight Playlist, select Options → Delete → All
b Enter Phone Password and press c (Confirm)
c Select Yes
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Playlist to play, select Options
→ Play
Changing Music Player
Settings
Repeat Mode
Default
■
OFF
Setting
Play a single track repeatedly, all files in All music,
or tracks from Playlist, randomly or repeatedly.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
10-7
10
Media Player
• To create new Playlist by selecting all tracks in
existing Playlist:
a Perform Steps 1 to 3
b Select Options → Add → Playlist
c Select Playlist from which to add all melodies
Play
10
BSelect Options → Player settings →
Repeat mode
Set one of two images to appear on Display while
CSelect an item and press c (Save)
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
Media Player
Tone Volume
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options → Player settings →
Tone volume
CUse a to adjust the volume and
press c (Save)
playing a melody.
BSelect Options → Player settings →
Audio Skin
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Visualization Mode
Visualization On/Off
Default
■
On
Setting
Audio Skin
Default
Setting
■
Rainbow wave
Select whether to display the skin set in
Visualization, to display the controller, and to
activate backlight settings on Display while playing
AAC or AAC+ format file within MPEG4.
10-8
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options → Player settings →
Visualization → Visualization mode
Skin, Show Controller, & Backlight
Default
Setting
Skin: Flowers
Show controller: Show
■ Backlight: Normal
■
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Playing Video
APress c and select Media Player →
Video
■
BPerform operations to select files
To select from All Video
Select one of 10 skins to display while playing a
Select All Video and highlight the file
melody file. To display this skin on the whole
To select from Recent video
window, set the Show controller to Hide. With the
Select Recent video and highlight the file
Backlight set to Always on, while handset is open,
view the skin while listening to music.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
To select from Most Played video
Select Most Played video and highlight the file
To select from Playlist ( P.10-7)
10-9
10
Media Player
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
BSelect Options → Player settings →
Visualization → Skin, Show controller,
or Backlight
CPress c (Play)
Ｎａｔｓｕ Ｍｏｖｉｅ−１
10
Media Player
再生
Video Player Window
a Artist's name and title (File name when the video
title information is unknown)
b Playing status : PLAY/PAUSE/STOP
c Progress bar
d File no./Total number of files
e Playing volume level
f Total playing time
g Elapsed playing time
10-10
Tip
• To set video file as Ringtone
Highlight the file press w (Set as) with suspending
Playback, then perform operations to set ( P.11-11).
The operations are unavailable for files those cannot be
set for ringtone.
• Playlist
a After Step 1, select Options → Create playlist
b Perform Steps 2 to 5 in "Create Playlist" ( P.10-6)
All Video
All playable files by Media Player's Video function
appear. Up to 9999 files can be listed.
Download videos
Use Download videos as shortcut to a download site.
Select to connect to a download site on the internet.
Recent video/Most Played video
Recent video shows playback record in recent days. The
most recent played file appears on top of the list. Most
Played Video shows frequently played files record. The
most frequent played file appears on top of the list. Up
to 100 records can be saved.
Player Window & List Options
Select Options in Player window or list and perform
operations listed below. Available items vary by file
type, etc.
Item
Item
Display video on the whole
window.
Add to playlist
Add a file to Playlist in All Video.
Select Selected file to add a
highlighted file to Playlist.
Select Multiple file to add multiple
files to Playlist.
Add
Add files to Playlist. Select Playlist
to add all files contained in another
Playlist. Select files to add selected
(not all) files to Playlist.
Delete
Delete a highlighted file or all files.
Rename
Move track in
playlist
Change order of files in Playlist.
Change file name.
Lock/Unlock
Stop
Stop playing video.
Set/release file protection.
Edit
Edit video files ( P.7-17).
Resolution
Set video display size.
Send
Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
Access a page containing a
View bookmark streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
Details
Confirm file size, etc.
Play via
Playback music files. When
Playback display, select Phone to
sound from speaker. Select A/V
headset to sound from speaker or
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) ( P.12-7).
Transfer to A/V
headset/
Transfer to
Phone
Toggle sound output between
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) and Phone
( P.12-7).
10-11
10
Media Player
View history
Description
Full screen view
Description
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Item
Description
Create Playlist
Create new Playlist ( P.10-6).
Rename
Change Playlist name.
10
Player settings
Media Player
Select settings related to Media
Player
( P.10-11).
Player Settings
Repeat Mode
Default
■
Off
Setting
Set to play a file repeatedly; set to play all files in a
folder at random or repeatedly.
APress c and select Media Player →
Video
BHighlight a file and press c (Play)
10-12
CSelect Options → Player settings →
Repeat mode
DSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tone Volume
APress c and select Media player →
Video
BHighlight a file and press c (Play)
CSelect Options → Player settings →
Tone volume
DUse a to adjust the volume and
press c (Save)
Resolution
Set the size of videos appearing on Display during
play or pause.
10
Media Player
APress c and select Media Player →
Video
BHighlight a file and press c (Play)
CSelect Options → Resolution and
select a size
10-13
10
Media Player
10-14
Managing Files
(Data Folder)
Folder
Data Folder
708SC files are organized in folders by file format.
Default Folders
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
additional sub-folders in Default folders as required.
Default
Ｄａｔａ Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ
Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓ※
Ｖｉｄｅｏｓ
Sｏｕｎｄｓ ＆ Ｒｉｎｇｔｏｎｅｓ※
S! Aｐｐｌｉ
Bｏｏｋ
Ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｏｃｕｍｅｎｔｓ※
Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
Pictures
All still images
Videos
All videos
MPEG4 (3GP,
MP4)
Sounds
Ringtones
All sounds
SMAF/MIDI/SPrecorded with
MIDI,
Voice Recorder,
MPEG4 Audio,
downloaded music,
AMR
and other sound
files
S! Appli S! Appli
Book
※ Sub-folder Pre-installed
(For files which come
pre-installed with
Other
documents
11-2
File Formats1
JPEG, BMP, GIF,
WBMP, PNG,
Animation GIF
Data Folder contains six Default folders; new files
are saved to the appropriate folder (see right). Create
Description
Save downloaded
electronic comic/
photo book files
JAVA
CCF
Documents,
SWF, SVG,
graphics/animation
vCard,
requiring File
vCalendar,
Viewer for display;
PDF,
XLS,
Flash® files,
DOC,
PPT,
TXT,
vFiles, etc. are
Unsupported files
saved here
1 Copy or move sorted files (by their file types) to other
folders as required.
Tip
• Savable number of files/folders
Up to 999 files/folders can be saved each Default
Folder.
Memory status
Download links
, displayed in Data Folder, is a shortcut to a
download site. If you select this shortcut, connect to a
download site on the internet.
Download Book feature
In Data Folder, Use Download Book in Book Folder as
shortcut to a download site. Select to connect to a
download site on the internet.
11-3
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
By selecting Memory status, view the memory usage of
each Data Folder.
Alternatively, use the setup menu to view this ( P158).
Saved Files
Opening Files
APress c and select Data Folder
11
BSelect the folder where a file is saved
Managing Files(Data Folder)
CHighlight a file and press c (View/
Play/Select)
Tip
• To use Slide Show
a Perform Steps 1 to 3 to display images
b Select Options → Slide show
• To enlarge or reduce image
a Perform Steps 1 to 3 to display an image
b Select Options → Zoom
c Press w ( ), o ( ), or a to enlarge,
reduce, or scroll the image
d Press C to return to the previous window
11-4
• After enlarging/reducing image
After b in "To enlarge or reduce image," press o
( ) to display list window.
Press o ( ) to change window view; select another
file to check.
• File List Indicators
: Nontransferable
: Nontransferable and unusable
: Protected
: Copyrighted file (Transferable, Content Key
valid)
: Copyrighted file (Transferable, Content Key
expired)
: Copyrighted file (Nontransferable, Content Key
valid)
: Copyrighted file (Nontransferable, Content Key
expired)
: Wallpaper set ( P.11-10)
: Ringtone set ( P.11-11)
• When another USIM Card is inserted into 708SC
Other than preinstalled nontransferable files/
preinstalled copyrighted files cannot be used.
• To show displayed image in Full screen view
After Step 3, select Options → Full screen view. For
partially displayed image, use a to change the
display area. Press o (Rotate) to rotate the image.
Press C to return to the previous view.
11
Activating Camera or Voice Recorder from
Data Folder
Select Options → Take photo; activate Camera in
Camera mode by highlighting the Pictures folder or an
image file captured by 708SC.
In the same way, select Options → Record video;
activate Camera in Video mode by highlighting the
Videos folder or a video captured by 708SC.
Select Options → Record sound; activate Voice
Recorder by highlighting the Sounds & Ringtones
folder or sound file captured by 708SC.
11-5
Managing Files(Data Folder)
• Viewing File Details
Select Options → Details
Note
• A file that is larger than 3 MB cannot be displayed.
Also, a file that is larger than 1600 x 1200 pixels
cannot be edited or zoomed. A file that is larger
than 1.3 MB cannot be set as Incoming image or
Substitute Image.
Using File Viewer
Open PDF, XLS, DOC, PPT, or TXT files saved in
Data Folder; File Viewer activates automatically.
11
CSelect Options/navigation shortcuts to
navigate
To scroll
Select Normal View or Full Screen View; navigate
Press a
files via Options or shortcuts.
To change Display appearance
Select Options → Full screen view or Normal
Managing Files(Data Folder)
Navigatio
view
To enlarge or reduce the image
aSelect Options → Zoom
bPress In or Out to enlarge/reduce
Normal View
Full Screen View
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect file location then file
To fit document size to Display
Select Options → Fit to screen
To move a page
Select Options → Go to and select an item
To move to specified page
aSelect Options → Go to → Page
bEnter page number
To capture current screen
Select Screen capture
11-6
To rotate image 90 degrees clockwise
File Viewer Settings
aSelect Options → Rotate
bSelect Options → Rotate to return to the
previous window
To search words in the page
Default
Setting
■
■
■
Panning: 10 pixel ■ Reflow: Off
Map on: On ■ Controller: On
Name: Capture
aSelect Options → Search
APress c and select Data Folder
bEnter words
BSelect save location and select the file
press 1 to continue searching backward,
CSelect Options → Settings
for the same word
DPerform operations to set
To view assigned shortcut keys
Select Options → FileViewer shortcuts
Tip
• After capturing
Captured files are saved in Other documents in 708SC
Data Folder (Phone) as JPEG format.
To assign scroll range per press of a
aSelect Panning
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To fit text width to Display
aSelect Reflow
bSelect On and press c (Save)
11-7
Managing Files(Data Folder)
cPress 3 to continue searching forward or
11
To set Map (shows display position) on/off
Navigation Shortcuts
aSelect Map on
Key
Side Key n
Zoom in
To set guide for shortcuts in Full screen view
Side Key b
Zoom out
Move to the first page
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Move to the previous page
To change default file mane
aSelect Name
Rotate 90 degrees clockwise or
cancel
Move to the next page
Select Normal View or Full Screen
View
aSelect Options → Settings → Controller
11
Description
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Managing Files(Data Folder)
bEnter a name
Tip
• When Reflow is set to On
Fit text width (such as doc. or txt.) to 708SC window
width. No need to scroll right/left to show the contents.
• When Map on is set to On
In bottom right of the window, map showing the
current position/area in the whole page appears. The
current position/area is indicated in red frame.
Move to the final page
Confirmation Window & List Options
For items other than window operation options, see
"Data Folder Options" ( P.11-13).
Note
• If a document includes many pages or complicated
designs, all pages of the document may not be able
to be displayed.
• If a file includes any language other than Japanese
or English, that file may not appear properly.
11-8
Viewing Graphics/Animation with
the SVG-T/Flash® Viewer
View SVG, SVGZ, and SWF formatted files in Data
Folder. When one of these files is selected from Data
Folder list, the SVG-T/Flash® Viewer is
CSelect Options/navigation shortcuts to
navigate
To change Display appearance
Select Options → Full screen view or Normal
view
11
To enlarge or reduce the image
View the graphics/animation on Normal View or Full
Screen View. In either mode, Options and shortcut
(Key operations) are available to control Display.
aSelect Options → Zoom
bPress w (
) to enlarge an image or o
) to reduce
cUse a to scroll the window
dPress c to return to the previous window
To pause or restart an flash® image
Select Options → Pause or Resume
To select image quality
Normal View
Select Options → Quality and select an item
Full Screen View
APress c and select Data Folder
To rotate the screen 90 degrees clockwise or
BSelect file location then file
Select Options → Rotate and select an item
counterclockwise
11-9
Managing Files(Data Folder)
automatically launched.
Tip
• To set an image for Wallpaper
Press w (Set as) on Normal View, or in Options of
Full Screen View, select Set as and select Wallpaper.
Confirmation Window & List Options
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
For items other than window operation options, see
"Data Folder Options" ( P.11-13).
Sorting Files
Sort files in various ways.
ASelect Options → Sort by
BSelect an item
To sort files in descending order of dates
Select Date
To sort files by file types
Select Type
To sort files by file names
Select Name
11-10
To sort files in ascending order of size
Select Size
To sort files by status of Content Key
Select Activation Status
Tip
• When folders are contained in a list
Folders are placed at the top in any order.
• Sorting order when Type is selected
Files are sorted in the alphabetical order of the file
extension (For example doc, jpg, swf, and such).
• Sorting order when Name is selected
Files are sorted in the order of number →
alphanumerics → Japanese character of the file names.
• Sorting order when Activation status is selected
Files are displayed in the following order:
Unrestricted file → Nontransferable file →
Copyrighted file (Content Key valid) → Copyrighted
file (Content Key expired) → Nontransferable and
unusable file
Using Files
Wallpaper
To set as Phonebook image for use with an
incoming call
aSelect Caller ID
bSearch and select an entry in which to place
the image and press c (Set)
Set an image file as Wallpaper of Display, an image
To set as Substitute Image for use with an
to display with incoming calls.
incoming Video Call
AHighlight a file and press w (Set as)
aSelect Still picture
To set while viewing an image
Highlight a file, press c (View) and press
w (Set as)
BSet the Use of the File
To set as Wallpaper on Display
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
in Phonebook, or a Substitute Image for Video Calls
bPress c (Save)
Tip
• To edit a still image ( P.7-15)
• To create a mobile postcard ( P.7-7)
• To print a still image ( P.12-12)
Select Wallpaper, confirm the preview and
press c (Set)
11-11
Setting Sound File as Ringtone
Change ringtone settings in Normal profile ( P.3-3).
APress c, select Data Folder and
select location to save the file
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
BHighlight the file and press w (Set as)
CPerform operations to set
To set ringtone for Voice Calls
Select Voice ringtone
To set ringtone for Video Calls
Select Video ringtone
To set ringtone for Phonebook entries
Tip
• Settings Restriction
MPEG4 files with audio codec (AAC, AAC+, or
Enhanced AAC+), can be set only when they are
copyrighted.
Setting Video File as Ringtone
Change ringtone settings in Normal profile ( P.3-3).
APress c, select Data Folder and
select location to save the file
BHighlight the file and press w (Set as)
CPerform operations to set
aSelect Caller ringtone
To set video file as ringtone for Voice Call
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry
Select Voice ringtone
To set ringtone for S! Mail/SMS
To set video file as ringtone for Video Call
Select Message alert tone
Select Video ringtone
To set ringtone for Phonebook entries
Select Caller ringtone
11-12
Tip
Saving a vFile
• Settings Restriction
MPEG4 files (mp4, 3gp) with audio codec (AAC,
AAC+, or Enhanced AAC+), can be set only when they
are copyrighted.
(extension: vcf) format for Phonebook data; also uses
Do data.
image
Highlight the file, press c (View) and press
w (Set as)
calendar, or as a scheduled event.
APress c, select Data Folder and
select save location for the vFile
BSelect a file and press c (Register)
BHighlight the file, press w (Set as)
CSelect Wallpaper
DCheck preview window and press
c (Set)
11-13
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
Save a vFile stored in Data Folder to Phonebook,
APress c and select Data Folder →
Other documents
To set while viewing a
data, etc. via the Internet. 708SC uses vCard
vCalendar (extension: vcs) format for Schedule/To
Setting Flash® file as
Wallpaper
Flash®
vFile is the standard format to exchange Phonebook
Data Folder Options
Perform the following operations from Options in list
or viewing windows. Options that appear vary by the
type of file or folder.
11
For Options used for the File Viewer or SVG-T/
Flash® Viewer, see "Using File Viewer" ( P.11-5) or
Managing Files(Data Folder)
"Viewing a Graphics/Animation with the SVG-T/
Flash® Viewer" ( P.11-8).
Item
Edit
Description
Edit a still image or Videos ( P.7-15).
Dynamic Effect/
Create Flash® images using Still
Dynamic effect
images ( P.7-19).
list
Full screen view
Display Still image in full screen
( P.11-5).
Playback
Playback video files.
When playback display, select Phone
to sound from speaker.
Select A/V headset to sound from
Bluetooth®-compatible devices (stereo
headphone, etc.) ( P.12-7).
11-14
Item
Description
Switch sound output to Bluetooth®Transfer to A/V
compatible devices (stereo headphone,
headset
etc.) ( P.12-7).
Register to
phonebook
Export a vCard file to Phonebook
( P.11-12).
Register to
Calendar
Export a vCalendar file to Calendar
( P.11-12).
Send
Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
mPostcard
Create a mobile postcard ( P.7-7).
Zoom
Enlarge or reduce still image being
confirmed ( P.11-3).
Browser access
Access linked site included in
electronic comic/photo book files.
Sort by
Sort files ( P.11-9).
Move
Move files from/to 708SC another
folder.
Copy
Copy files and paste from/to 708SC
another folder.
Item
Add to playlist
Description
Add files to Playlist.
Highlight Selected and select to add a
file.
Highlight Multiple and select to add
multiple files at once.
Item
Description
Create folder
Create a new folder ( P.11-15).
Print Still images using the printer via
USB/Bluetooth® connection.
Delete
Delete a file/files ( P.11-17).
Delete folder
Delete a folder ( P.11-17).
Take photo
Activate Camera in Camera mode
( P.11-4).
Print via
Activate Camera in Video mode
( P.11-4).
Lock/Unlock
Set/release file protection.
Purchase or acquire Content Key.
Record video
Record sound
Activate Voice Recorder ( P.11-4).
Download
content key
Rename
Change file name ( P.11-15).
Details
Confirm file/folder properties.
Rename folder
Change folder name ( P.11-15).
Show/Hide file
info
In List window for Picture Folder with
thumbnail view, set to display folder/
file name when highlighted.
Content key
info
Show the list of Content Keys for the
files in Data Folder; manage them by
selecting Delete to delete ( P.11-19)
or Details to check the details.
11-15
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
View By
Select List window type for Picture
Folder.
Select List to show folder/file in list
view.
Select Thumbnail view to show folder/
file in thumbnail view.
Create sub-folders in Default folders.
BSelect Default folder and highlight a
sub-folder or a file to change the
name, select Options → Rename
folder or Rename
APress c and select Data Folder
CEnter a name
Managing Files/Folders
Create Folder
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
BSelect Default folder to create a
sub-folder
CSelect Options → Create folder
DEnter a name
Tip
• When a file is locked
You cannot change the file name.
Moving a File/Folder
Move a file/folder to another folder or a location
Changing a File Name/Folder
Name
Change the name of a file or a created sub-folder.
APress c and select Data Folder
outside folders.
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Default folder and highlight a
sub-folder or a file to move
CSelect Options → Move
11-16
DMove the file or folder
To move one file or all files in the same folder
or all created sub-folders
• When there is a file or folder with the same name at
the destination
You have to change the name of the file or folder to
move. In message text, enter a new name.
Select Selected or All
Note
sub-folders
• The files downloaded with 708SC may not appear/
playback properly when moving to other mobile
phones or inserting other's USIM Card into 708SC.
aSelect Multiple
bCheck files or created sub-folders to move
and press w (Move)
ESelect the destination folder → Move
here
Tip
• To check/uncheck all files or folders at once
Press o (Mark all) or o (Unmark all)
• When a file is locked
You cannot move the file.
Copying Files/Folders
Make a copy of a file or folder in another folder or a
location outside folders.
APress c and select Data Folder
BHighlight a folder or a file to copy,
select Options → Copy
11-17
11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
To select and move multiple files or created
CCopy the file or folder
To copy one file or all files in the same folder
or all folders
• When there is a file or folder with the same name in
the destination
You have to change the name of the file or folder to
paste. In message text, enter a new name.
Select Selected or All
To select and copy multiple files or folders
Note
11
aSelect Multiple
Managing Files(Data Folder)
bCheck files or folders to copy and press
• The file that forwarding is impossible and the
copyrighted file cannot be copied.
w (Copy)
DSelect the destination folder and
select Paste here
Tip
• To check/uncheck all files or folders at once
( P.11-16)
• When a copy of a file or folder is pasted to the same
location as the original
• The pasted file or folder is saved under another name,
i.e., _001 is automatically added to the name.
11-18
Deleting a File/Folder
Delete
APress c and select Data Folder
BHighlight a file, select Options →
Delete
CDelete the file
To delete one file
Select Selected → Yes
• When file has Content Key
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to delete
both the file and Content Key.
To delete all files from the same folder
Delete Folder
aSelect All
APress c and select Data Folder
bEnter Phone Password press c (Confirm)
To select and delete multiple files
aSelect Multiple
bCheck files, press w (Delete)
cEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm) (If all files are checked)
dSelect Yes
Tip
11
BSelect Default folder and highlight a
created sub-folder to delete, select
Options → Delete folder
CEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
If no file saved in a sub-folder
Phone Password is not required.
• To check/uncheck files or folders at once ( P.11-16)
• If a file is set as Wallpaper or ringtone, or locked
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to execute
deletion. To delete multiple or all files, select No to
delete only those files without setting or protection.
11-19
Managing Files(Data Folder)
and select Yes
Tip
• If a folder contains files set as Wallpaper, ringtones,
or locked/copyrighted files
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to execute
folder deletion. Select No to delete only files without
designated uses or protection, leaving the folder
undeleted.
• When file in a folder has Content Key
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to delete
both the file and Content Key.
Deleting a Content Key
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Options → Contents key info
CPerform operations to delete
To delete a Content Key
Select Selected
To delete all Content Keys
Select Delete all
11-20
External Connections
External Connections
Send and receive data to/from a Bluetooth®compatible device, without any physical connection.
12
Before Using Bluetooth®
Communications
Bluetooth® communications can be performed only
Alternatively, connect 708SC with various devices,
when others using Bluetooth®-compatible devices
like a Personal Computer or a printer to exchange
with the same profiles.
data or print out images via a USB cable.
The Bluetooth® specifications of 708SC are as listed
External Connections
Bluetooth®
Exchange data among Bluetooth®-compatible
devices including mobile phones such as 708SC
below.
Item
using signals. When a Bluetooth® handsfree device
Applicable
profiles
Headset
Handsfree
Serial Port
Dialup Networking
File Transfer
Object Push
Advanced Audio Distribute
Audio/Video Remote Control
Basic Imaging
Basic Printing1
Output
Bluetooth® Power Class2
is connected, converse without operating 708SC
directly with your hands. Alternatively, use a dialupconnection devices, to access the Internet or for other
purposes.
12-2
Specification
Communication
Bluetooth® Standard Version 1.2
Standard
Item
Line-of-signal
distance2
Specification
Approximately 10 meters or less
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
used
1 For Printing function only.
2 Varies by radio interference and other conditions.
Bluetooth® Precautions
• Exchanging data may be unavailable with some
devices even if they are Bluetooth®-compatible
devices and they may have different operating
procedures, displays or actions of 708SC,
depending on their characteristics and/or
specifications.
• The radio band (2.4GHz) used by Bluetooth®compatible devices is also used by various other
devices. Therefore, the transmission rate or
distance may be reduced or communications may
be blocked due to the influences of other devices.
• 708SC Bluetooth® function does not allow
multiple devices when Bluetooth®-compatible
headset is connected.
• USB and Bluetooth® functions cannot be used at
the same time.
• Set the Bluetooth® function off before connecting
a USB cable to handset.
Tip
• To check Bluetooth® functions available
a Press c and select Settings → Connectivity →
Bluetooth → Bluetooth service
b Select an item and view the contents
• To confirm the device address of 708SC
Press c and select Settings → Connectivity →
Bluetooth → My Information
12-3
12
External Connections
• 708SC may not work with all Bluetooth®compatible devices.
• Talking using wireless or handsfree mode may
induce noise depending on the other connected
devices and/or the communications environment.
Sending & Receiving Data
Send and receive Phonebook entries, My Phonebook
details, Schedule information, Task information, still
images, video, sound files, vFiles, and others.
Search New Device
Register a Bluetooth®-compatible device to the My
devices list. Register a maximum of 10 devices.
When registering a device, the same passkey must be
entered into 708SC and the other device.
Activation
12
Default
■
Activate the Bluetooth® function of the other device
Off
External Connections
Setting
Setting the Bluetooth® function On activates
connection with a Bluetooth®-compatible device and
causes
to appear at the top of Display.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth →
Activation
BSelect the setting
12-4
beforehand.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth → My
devices
BSelect Search new device
CWhen devices replying to the search
have appeared, select the device to
register
DEnter passkey (4 to 16 digits) and
press c
EWithin 30 seconds, enter the same
passkey on the other device
Tip
• If authentication with the other device has failed
A confirmation message appears asking whether to try
authentication again. Select Yes to retry.
• If ten peripheral devices have already been
registered
A message indicating the device memory is full
appears.
• To change the name of a registered device
a Press c and select Settings → Connectivity →
Bluetooth → My devices
b Highlight a device, select Options → Rename
c Enter a new name
• To delete a device from My devices
a Press c and select Settings → Connectivity →
Bluetooth → My devices
b Highlight a device, select Options → Delete →
Selected or All
c Enter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) (In the
case of All only) and select Yes
• To search for or register a device from other
Bluetooth®-compatible devices ( P.12-10)
12-5
12
External Connections
• Passkey
The Passkey is a password used to connect
Bluetooth®-compatible devices. When connecting to a
handsfree device, enter the Passkey specified for it.
You are not required to enter the Passkey again for a
registered device.
• To check Bluetooth® functions available for each
device
a Press c and select Settings → Connectivity →
Bluetooth → My devices
b Highlight a device, select Options → Service list
c Highlight an item, select Options → Help and view
the contents
12
Icons displayed on the My devices list
bIn list window, select Options → Send → Via
The device name is preceded by the following icons.
: Personal Computer
: Mobile phone
: Handsfree device/Headset
: PDA
: Printer
: Other
To send files from other functions (except
bluetooth
Data Folder)
External Connections
Connection request from another Bluetooth®compatible device
aIn list window for each functions, highlight
If a message indicating that there is a connection
request from another Bluetooth®-compatible device
appears, select Yes and enter the same Passkey as that of
the other device within 30 seconds.
If there is a connection request from an already
registered device, such as a handsfree device, 708SC
will be automatically connected.
bSelect Options → Send → Via bluetooth
Sending Files
Send data from Options of function windows. After
the receiving side approves a communication,
sending is started.
APerform operations to set
To send files from Data Folder
aHighlight the data to send
12-6
the data to send
BSelect the device of the receiver
When the receiver's device has not been
registered
Select Service new device, search for that device
and register it ( P.12-4)
Tip
• To send data after viewing the contents
Some functions allow sending option from Details/
Playback window.
Receiving a File
When connection from the sender is approved, file
CSelect headset device
To register device
reception starts and the received file is saved in Data
Select Search new device and search the device
Folder.
to register ( P.12-4)
AWhen a confirmation window
appears, select Yes
A/V Headset
devices to Media Player to enjoy playback sounds.
APlayback Melody/video files using
Media Player ( P.10-3, 10-9)
BSelect Options → Transfer to A/V
headset
Print Still image in Data Folder
Connect Bluetooth®-compatible printer to 708SC;
enable to print Still images/vFiles in Data Folder
directly through handling 708SC. Set paper size/
number for printing with 708SC.
See User Guide attached to printer for printer
operations/paper settings.
12-7
12
External Connections
Connect Bluetooth®-compatible headphone/headset
Tip
• Operations while Melody is stopped
a In Melody Playback window, select Options →
Play via → A/V headset
b Select the destination device or Search new device
and search the device to register ( P.12-4)
AIn Data Folder list window, highlight
still image/vFile
BSelect Options → Print via →
Bluetooth
CSelect receiver's device
To register receiver's device
12
Select Search new device to search and register
External Connections
( P.12-4)
DPerform operations to set
To set whether or not to print a frame
Select Frame and the setting
To set a print quality
Select Print quality and the setting
EPress o (Preview)
FCheck the preview window and press
c (Print)
Accessing Connected Device Files
To set a paper size
Access the shared folders and files of the other
Select Paper size and the setting
party's device. Alternatively, receive or delete data
To set the number of copies
residing on the other device.
Select Number of copies, enter the number of
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth → My
devices
copies (1 to 99) and press c
To set the number of pages to print on a sheet
Select Paper per sheet and the setting (1 to 16)
To set whether or not to print the date
12-8
Select Date print and the setting
BSelect a device
CApprove access on the side sharing
the data
Waiting Connection Request
In the steps given below, 708SC is placed in mode
waiting for a handsfree-device connection request.
Tip
• To receive an accessed file
After Step 3, select a file to receive.
Locations of received files
Connecting Handsfree
BSelect a handsfree-compatible device
When Passkey entry window appears
Enter the same Passkey as is set for the
handsfree device
Answering Mode
Register the handsfree device following the steps for
"Search for and Register a Bluetooth®-Compatible
Device" ( P.12-4) beforehand.
Default
■
Normal
Setting
If the setting is changed to Automatic a call to 708SC
will be answered without the operation of any keys.
12-9
12
External Connections
Received files are automatically saved to Data Folder.
The type of the folder that a file is saved to vary by file
format; for example, JPEG and BMP files are saved to
the Pictures folder and vFiles to the Other documents
folder.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth → My
devices
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth →
Answering mode
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth →
Handsfree setting
BSelect the setting
BSelect the setting
Tip
12
Tip
External Connections
• To set the time (Seconds) before automatic
reception
After Step 1, highlight Automatic, select Options →
Edit and select the number of seconds to ring before
answering.
Handsfree Mode
Default
■
• While Private Mode is set
Answer outgoing/incoming calls with 708SC for calls
made with 708SC; answer outgoing/incoming calls
with handsfree devices for calls made with handsfree
devices.
• While Handsfree Mode is set
Answer all outgoing/incoming calls with handsfree
devices.
Handsfree Mode
Setting
Select answer settings for calls when handsfree
devices connected.
Changing Bluetooth® Settings
My Phone's Visibility
Default
Setting
12-10
■
On
To activate search and saving from other Bluetooth®compatible devices, you have to make your 708SC
visible.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth → My
phone's visibility
BSelect the setting
Bluetooth® Name
Default
■
12
708SC
The displayed name shown on another device for
your 708SC can be changed.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth → My
Information
BSelect Bluetooth Name
CModify the name and press c
12-11
External Connections
Setting
Secure Mode for Data Transfer
Default
■
On
Setting
If set On, a confirmation message appears before you
sending data.
12
External Connections
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity → Bluetooth → Secure
mode
BSelect the setting
Connecting to a PC
Perform the following:
• Send files from Data Folder of 708SC
• Receive files from the PC and saving them to Data
Folder
• Perform packet data communications
Before Using the USB Connection
Before connecting 708SC to a PC with a USB cable,
you have to install the USB driver and the Samsung
PC Studio. For more information about the
installation procedure, operating conditions of a PC
USB Connection
Connect 708SC to a PC via a USB cable to exchange
data between the devices. Alternatively, connect a
printer to print still images.
available, etc., see the User's guide in the attached
CD-ROM.
Connecting to a Printer
Connect 708SC to a PictBridge-compatible printer
with a USB cable and directly print still images from
12-12
Data Folder. Alternatively, set a paper size, number
Select Number of copies, enter the number of
of copies, and other items from 708SC.
copies (1 to 99) and press c
For more information about printer operations and
paper setting, see the printer's User Manual.
Printing a Still Image from Data
Folder
AHighlight a still image file in Data
Folder
12
External Connections
BSelect Options → Print via → USB
CConnect 708SC to a printer with a
USB cable
DSelect the printer settings
To set a paper size
Select Paper size and select the setting
To set the number of copies
12-13
To set the number of pages to print on a sheet
Select Paper per sheet and select the setting (1
to 16)
To set whether or not to print the date
Select Date print and select the setting
To set whether or not to print a frame
Select Border and select the setting
To set a print quality
Select Print quality and select the setting
EPress c
FCheck the preview window and press
c (Print)
Note
• Never disconnect the USB cable during printing.
12-14
Security
Change Phone Password
Default
Setting
■
9999
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Change phone password
BEnter current Phone Password and
press c (Confirm)
13
Security
CEnter new Phone Password (4 digits)
and press c (Confirm)
DEnter new Phone Password again
and press c (Confirm)
PIN
PINs are security codes for USIM Card. For more
information, see "USIM Card" ( P.1-2).
13-2
Changing PIN/PIN2
APress c and select Settings →
Security → Change PIN code or
Change PIN2 code
BEnter current PIN or PIN2 and press
c (Confirm)
CEnter new PIN or PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)
and press c (Confirm)
DEnter new PIN or PIN2 again and
press
c (Confirm)
Note
• When PIN lock ( P.13-3) is set to Disable, PIN
cannot be changed.
PIN Lock
Default
Setting
■
Enable
To require PIN authentication each time the power is
Resetting PIN Lock
If PIN or PIN2 is been incorrectly entered three
consecutive times, PIN or PIN2 lock is set,
restricting operations of 708SC. Unlock PIN or PIN2
turned on, set this function to Enable.
lock in the steps given below.
APress c and select Settings →
Security → PIN lock
AWith PIN lock unlocking code (PUK
Code) entry window displayed, enter
PUK Code and press c (Confirm)
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter new PIN or PIN2 again and
press c
13-3
13
Security
CEnter PIN and press c (Confirm)
BEnter new PIN or PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)
and press c
Note
• For more information about PIN and PIN2 lock
unlocking codes (PUK and PUK2 Codes), contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25).
• If incorrect PIN lock unlocking code is entered ten
consecutive times, USIM Card is locked (The count
is not cleared when handset is turned off).
• There is no way to unlock the locked USIM Card.
Contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
13
APress c and select Settings →
Security → USIM lock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter a USIM password (4 to 8
digits) and press c (Confirm)
To set Disable
The settings are saved and the operation
completes.
Security
USIM Lock
Default
Setting
■
Disable
Set handset so that it is deactivated unless a USIM
password is entered when another USIM Card is
installed in handset.
13-4
To set Enable
Proceed to Step 4
DEnter the USIM password again and
press c (Confirm)
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
• USIM password
This is a password dedicated to USIM Card
authentication. If the USIM password matches, the
other USIM Card can also be used for 708SC.
Change USIM password each time the USIM check
setting is set to Enable.
• When you forget your USIM password
Insert a USIM Card (with USIM lock set to Enable) to
708SC and execute All reset ( P.13-11).
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
Password Lock
Default
Setting
■
Disable
Set Password lock to Enable; then hide Softkeys in
Handset Security
13
Standby. Press any key; Phone Password entry
Phone Lock
Default
Setting
■
Disable
Set Phone lock to Enable; then Phone Password
entry is required each time the power is turned on.
APress c and select Settings →
Security → Phone lock
Password lock; 708SC operations are enabled.
APress c and select Settings →
Security → Password lock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
13-5
Security
window appears. Enter Phone Password to cancel
Tip
• When Password lock is canceled
Password lock is automatically set to Disable.
Privacy Lock
Default
Setting
■
Unlock all
Set Privacy lock to require Phone Password entry
13
each time calling up checked function/functions
Security
(selected among All, Messages, Data Folder,
Phonebook, Call log, Calendar).
APress c and select Settings →
Security → Privacy lock
BCheck the functions to lock and press
w (Save)
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
13-6
Activate Secret Mode
Default
Setting
■
Hide
Set Secret Mode to Hide; then hide the saved entry
information (with Phonebook Secret Mode On) in
Phonebook list.
APress c and select Settings →
Security → Activate Secret mode
BEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
DSelect On and press c (Select)
Tip
• Under following conditions, 708SC turns the setting
to Hide; Activate Secret mode is set to Show then
708SC is powered on again.
ESelect Recipients field and enter an
address
To select an address from Phonebook
Mobile Tracker
Default
Setting
■
Off
Set Mobile tracker to On; then 708SC notifies when
another USIM Card (not the one in 708SC during the
notification. Up to 2 addresses can be specified.
APress c and select Settings →
Security → Mobile tracker
BEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
CSelect Activation field
Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
cHighlight phone number and press c
13
(Select)
Security
setting operations) is inserted. Set SMS address for
aHighlight To field and select Options →
To enter a phone number directly
aHighlight To field and select Options →
Direct input
bEnter phone number
FPress w (Done)
GSelect Sender field and enter a
sender's name
13-7
HPress w (Save)
IPress w (Accept) after checking the
items
Tip
• To delete an address
After Step 5, highlight the address, select Options →
Delete
With another USIM Card inserted
When powered on replacing with another USIM Card;
708SC send a notification SMS to your specified
address during the handset activation. The SMS sending
never come to the person (who replace the USIM
Card)'s notice. 708SC also send a notification SMS
when Phone Password is incorrectly entered three
consecutive times during Mobile tracker setting is Off.
13
Security
Rejecting Incoming Calls
Reject calls by callers who do not send caller IDs/by
callers who are unable to send caller IDs. In addition,
nuisance calls can also be rejected by registering the
caller phone numbers to a Black list.
13-8
Reject Withheld
Default
Setting
■
Off
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → All calls → Reject incoming
calls
BSelect Reject withheld field
DPress w (Save)
Reject Unavailable
Default
Setting
■
Off
BSelect Reject unavailable field
CSelect the setting and press c
DPress w (Save)
Black List
13
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → All calls → Reject incoming
calls
BSelect Black list field
CSet the phone number
Reject/accept calls by callers who are unable to send
To enter a phone number directly
caller IDs, like International calls from overseas/
aSelect Options → Add → Direct input
transferred calls from landlines.
bEnter phone number
13-9
Security
CSelect the setting and press c
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → All calls → Reject incoming
calls
To select a phone number from Phonebook
Reject Black List
aSelect Options → Add → Phonebook
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → All calls → Reject incoming
calls
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
cSelect phone number
To enter a phone number using Call Log
aSelect Options → Add → Call log
bSelect the log record
13
DPress C and press w (Save)
Security
Tip
• To delete phone numbers from Black list
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Highlight the phone number to delete, select
Options → Delete → Selected or All → Yes
13-10
BSelect Reject black list field
CSelect the setting and press c
DPress w (Save)
Calls from phone numbers in Black list
Calls are not connected. Caller hears a busy tone.
Missed call appears in Standby. Press w (View) to see
Missed Calls.
Restoring Defaults
Clear Memory
Clear Data Folder, Messaging folders, Phonebook
(Phone) entries, and Calendar entries each or all at
once.
APress c and select Settings →
Memory settings → Phone memory →
Clear memory
CEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Reset Settings
Clear Saved contents/settings and restore defaults.
However, the following contents are not restored.
Setting menu
Phone settings
Content not to be reset
Contents set in Time and Date fields
for Time & date
Display settings Contents set in Brightness
Call settings
All calls→Reject incoming calls→
contents saved in Black list
Voice call/Video call→contents saved/
set in Diverts
Voice call→contents set in Call
waiting
Contents set in Call barring
Contents set in Voice mail
Phonebook
settings
Contents saved/set in My phonebook
details, Category settings
Connectivity
Preferred networks
Security
USIM lock, PIN lock, Change PIN
code, Change PIN2 code
13-11
13
Security
BCheck items to reset and press
w (OK)
Master Reset
APress c and select Settings →
Memory settings → Phone memory →
Master reset → Reset settings
BEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Reset All
Restore 708SC defaults and delete Phonebook
(Phone), Messaging, and Data Folder contents/
settings. Original files and S! Appli are restored.
APress c, select Settings → Memory
settings → Phone memory → Master
reset → Reset all
BEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
13-12
Tools
Alarms
Wake-up Alarm/Alarms
Register a Wake-up alarm and 4 other alarms. Each
alarm can be named and the name given to Alarm
appears when Alarm sounds. Once an alarm time is
ESelect and set other items as required
Set a name (Wake-up alarm cannot be edited)
aSelect Alarm name field
bEnter the name to set
Set Alarm time
Highlight Alarm time field and enter the time
saved, it can only be set/reset by switching Alarm
Set an Alarm sound
activation to On or Off. In addition to setting one
aSelect Alert tone field
time only alarm, set alarms to repeat on specific days
bSelect the location of sound file, select an
of the week or everyday.
alarm sound and press c
14
APress c and select Tools → Alarms
Set Vibrator
Tools
BSelect an alarm from Wake-up alarm
to Alarm4
bSelect the setting and press c
CSelect Alarm activation field
DSelect On and press c
14-2
aSelect Vibration field
Set Alarm volume
aSelect Alarm volume field
bUse s to adjust the volume
cPress w (Play) to check the volume and
press c (Save)
Set whether to sound repeatedly or only one
time
aSelect Repeat field
bSelect Everyday or Once alarm and press
Set days of the week for a repeated alarm to
sound
aSelect Repeat field
bSelect Specify days and press c (Edit)
Tip
• When wake-up alarm/alarms are set
appears.
• When wake-up alarm and/or multiple alarms have
been set for the same activation time
Wake-up alarm takes priority over Alarm1 to Alarm4.
Among alarms, the last set one takes priority.
• Alarm volume settings
Select
to adjust volume step by step. Alarm volume
become louder gradually.
cCheck the days to set and press w (OK)
Set a snooze procedure
14
aSelect Snooze field
Tools
bSelect the setting and press c
If you do not want to activate Alarm yet
aSelect Alarm activation field
bSelect Off and press c
FPress w (Save)
14-3
When the time set for Wake-up alarm/Alarm
comes
Press any key twice to clear an indicator; with Snooze
On, press o (End).
Alarm sounds and a message appears if an alarm sound
is set to mute ( P.9-4), you are notified by the vibrator
even when Alarm sound is not set to On in Step 5.
Alternatively, notify using vibrator with vibration
setting On. Press any key to stop Alarm sound and press
any key again to clear the message.
When the time set comes while capturing video
or recording sound
When Snooze is not set to Off
14
Tools
Until Snooze canceling operation takes place, alarm
notification continues for about one minute repeatedly
in specified time intervals. The notification repeated up
to six times. If no key operation or any key operations
other than y, o (End) take place during alarm
notification, alarm sound stops; notification with alarm
is set to sound again after specified time elapsed. To
cancel Snooze, press y or o (End).
When a call is being initiated or during a call
During a call or connection (Connecting…appears),
708SC notifies with a short sound and indicator;
uncheck Alerts on call (in Phone sounds setting) to
notify only by an indicator. When an outgoing call is
being Initiated (Dialing…appears), 708SC notifies with
a short sound and indicator as connection established.
14-4
Alarm sound is generated as soon as capturing of
recording finishes.
Auto Power On
Default
■
Off
Setting
If you set this setting to On, even when the power is
turned off, the power is automatically turned on at
the time set for a wake-up alarm or alarm.
APress c and select Tools → Alarms
→ Auto power
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
Note
• Cancel Auto power settings under following
conditions; near electronic devices requiring highprecision control or handling weak signals, in places
such as airplanes or hospitals prohibiting the use of
mobile phones.
Viewing Calendar
There are three modes for displaying Calendar.
Select a date on Monthly or Weekly view window to
display Daily view window for the selected day.
When the Time for Wake-up alarm/Alarm
comes
708SC automatically turned the power on. Deactivating
alarm sound, display indicator, snooze function is
performed by the same operation as usual ( P.14-4).
Stop alarm sound and go off display indicator; 708SC
shows Standby display and continues to power on.
Displaying Calendar
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
Weekly View Window
(In Yellow) : Anniversary
: Highlighted position
(Date in light blue) : Current registered
(In Blue) : Schedule registered
day
(In Green) : Memo registered
Date in red: Holiday/Sunday
(In Red) : Task registered
: Schedule
: Anniversary
: Holiday
: Memo
: Task
: Priority
: Alarm set
: Repetition set
14
Tools
Calendar
Monthly View Window
Daily View
14-5
Tip
• To display the previous or next month on Monthly
view window
Press */#, highlight Year/Month field and
press s
14
Calendar Window Format
Default
Setting
■
■
Starting day: Sunday
Default view mode: Monthly view
Tools
• To display the previous or next week on Weekly
view window
Press */#, highlight Year/Month field and
press s
Set Calendar to begin with Sunday or Monday.
• To display the previous or next day on Daily view
window
Press s, *, or #
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
• To view a particular month or week
From Monthly view window or Weekly view window,
change Display by specifying year, month, and day as
follows.
a In the calendar window, select Options → Go to
b Select Date, enter the year, month, and day and
press c
When Today is selected in Step b, the current date is
highlighted on the window of the current month or
week.
BSelect Options → Settings
Alternatively, set the window displayed when
activating Calendar.
CSelect settings
Set the first day of week
aSelect Starting day
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Set the default view mode
aSelect Default view mode
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
14-6
Tip
• When settings are changed
A change in Starting day is immediately reflected.
Selecting the settings of Default view mode can be
applied when you deactivate calendar and then
reactivate it.
• To temporarily change display mode
In the calendar window, select Options → View mode
→ Display mode
CSelect items and make settings
Set a title
Select Title field and enter a text
Set details
Select Details field and enter a text
Set a starting date
Highlight Start date field and enter a date
Set a starting time
Saving New Entries to
Calendar
Highlight Start time field and enter a time
Set an ending date
Highlight End date field and enter a date
Set an ending time
Save a maximum of 100 items.
Highlight End time field and enter a time
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
Set an event location
14
Tools
Scheduled Events
Select Location field and enter a text
BSelect Options → Add new →
Schedule
14-7
Set an alarm
aCheck Alarm field to select
bHighlight Before field, enter an interval
before Alarm time, use s to highlight Unit
field and switch to an appropriate unit
cSelect Alert tone field, select a location of
sound files and select an alert tone
Set Repeat
aCheck Repeat field to select
bUse s to highlight Time cycle field and
specify the time cycle unit
14
cHighlight Value field and enter a value
Tools
dHighlight Until date field and enter a year,
month, and day to stop repetition
Set Expiry time for a Calendar Event
Use s to highlight Expiry field and switch the
expiry limit
DPress w (Save)
14-8
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a Start date and/or End
date
Put cursor on the target date on Calendar window
before Step 2 to show that date in Start date or End date
field.
• When an event entry has expired
An event is automatically deleted from Calendar when
it expires. For example, if the expiration is set to After
1 year, and event repetition not set, the indication is
deleted when one year has elapsed from the ending
date of the event. With repetition set, it is deleted one
year after the ending date of the last repetition. To
deactivate automatic deletion, set the expiry to
Disable.
to highlight Unit field and switch to an
Anniversary/Holiday
Register a maximum of 50 anniversaries and 50
holidays.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options → Add new →
Anniversary or Holiday
CSelect items and make settings
Set a text
aSelect Text entry field
dSelect Alert tone field, select the location of
sound of files and select an alert tone
Set to repeat every year
Check Repeat every year field
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a date
Put cursor on the target date on Calendar window
before Step 2 to show that date in Date field.
14
Tools
bEnter text
appropriate unit
cHighlight Alarm time field, and enter a time
Set a date
Highlight Date field and enter the date
Set an alarm (Anniversary only)
aCheck Alarm field to select
bHighlight Before field, enter an interval
before the anniversary Alarm time, use s
14-9
Memo
Up to 20 memos can be registered. Memos can be
registered even while talking ( P.2-9, 6-6).
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options → Add new → Memo
CSelect the memo text box and enter
text
14
To set the date
Select Date and enter the date
Tools
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a date ( P.14-9)
Tasks
Register a maximum of 100 time-limited items and
manage them in a list.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options → Add new → Task
CSelect items and make settings
Set a title
aSelect Title field
bEnter title
14-10
Set a description of the task
DPress w (Save)
aSelect Task field
bEnter text
To set the starting date
Highlight Start date field and enter the date
To set the due date
Highlight Due date field and enter the date
Set an alarm
aCheck Alarm field
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a Starting date or Due
date
Put cursor on the target date on Calendar window
before Step 2 to show that date in Starting date and
Due date field.
Volume of Alarm sound
long before the task starts the alarm should
The volume follows the setting of Tone volume for
Voice calls; the setting of Voice call in Vibration for
Vibrator.
sound, use s to highlight field of units and
When the time set for Alarm comes
bHighlight Before field, enter a value for how
cHighlight Alarm time field and enter the time
dSelect Alert tone field, select the location of
sound files and select an alert tone
Set a priority level
Use s to highlight Priority field and select a
value
14
Alarm sounds and a message appears. To stop Alarm,
press any key. Press c to cancel the message display.
With no action to stop Alarm, a message appears
indicating Missed alarm event. Press w (View) to
view the message.
When a call is being initiated or during a call
During a call or connection (Connecting…appears),
708SC notifies with a short sound and indicator;
uncheck Alerts on call (in Phone sounds setting) to
14-11
Tools
select an appropriate unit
notify only by an indicator. When an outgoing call is
being Initiated (Dialing…appears), 708SC notifies only
by an indicator. Press c to clear an indicator.
Viewing Saved Calendar
Entries
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BOpen a window listing items
To check items of one day
Select a date on Monthly view window or
Weekly view window, or use s to change the
date on Daily view window
14
To check registered contents by type
Tools
Select Options → Event list and select a type
To check the message of a missed alarm
Select Options → Missed alarm event
CSelect and view details
Tip
14-12
• To check calendar item status
Select Options in Calendar or registered contents list
and Memory status; check the number of savings by
type.
Editing Calendar Entries
Editing and Saving as New Entries
In addition to edit and update the entries, edit the
Select Options → Event list and select a type
CSelect an item to edit
DPress c (Edit)
EChange the information as required
FPress w (Save) and select New or
Update
entries and save them as new entries.
Marking a Task as Completed
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BOpen a window listing entries
BSelect Options → Event list → Task
day
CHighlight a completed task, select
Select a date on Monthly view window or
Options → Completed
Weekly view window, or use s to change the
To remove the completion mark
date on Daily view window
Select Options → To do
To view events by type
14-13
Tools
To open a window listing entries for a single
14
Tip
• To sort tasks
In the Task window, select Options → Sort by and
select a sorting type. Classify tasks into completed/
uncompleted ones or sort them by due date or priority.
Deleting Calendar Entries
AIn Calendar window or saved
contents list, select Options → Delete
BDelete the entry
14
To delete only the highlighted entry
Tools
Select Selected → Yes
To delete all entries of the current month or
week
Select This month or This week → Yes
To delete only entries from a specific period
of time
aSelect Periods
14-14
bEnter the start and end dates
cPress c (Delete) and select Yes
To delete all entries or all before the
highlighted date
Calendar Options
aSelect All or All past data
Perform the following operations from Options on a
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm)
window listing Calendar entries:
and select Yes
Description
Save a new Calendar entry ( P.14-7).
Send schedule/
Send task
Send Calendar entry via S! Mail
( P.17-6) or Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
View mode
Select a display mode ( P.14-7).
Go to
Display a particular month or week by
changing Monthly/Weekly view
window ( P.14-6).
Event list
View events listed by type ( P.14-12).
14
Delete
Delete a Calendar entry ( P.14-13).
Completed/To
do
Set or cancel the task completion mark
( P.14-12).
Tools
Tip
• To collectively delete multiple registered items
Select registered unnecessary items from a list by type
and delete them collectively.
a Press c and select Tools → Calendar
b Select Options → Event list and select the type
c Select Options → Delete → Multiple
d Check the items to delete, press w (Delete) and
select Yes
Item
Add new
Sort by
Sort tasks ( P.14-13).
Save to Data
Folder
Create a vFile and save it to Other
documents in Data Folder.
Settings
Select Calendar Display settings
( P.14-6).
14-15
Item
Description
Missed alarm
event
View the message of a missed alarm
( P.14-12).
Print via
Bluetooth
Print highlighted schedule event or
task using the printer via Bluetooth®
connection.
Memory status
Check memory usage for Calendar
functions ( P.14-12).
Voice Recorder Window
Control Voice Recorder with Softkeys and
navigation key.
Navigation key
Remaining recording time
Voice Recorder
Voice Recorder can record voice of a maximum of 60
Elapsed time
Recording Window
minutes. Voice Recorder can be started from the tool
14
menu, as well as during a call, Options of Data
Tools
Folder, or Message creation window. Voice recording
Navigation key
can be activated during a call.
Play time
Elapsed time
Playback Window
14-16
Recording Voice
To record voice from Options ( P.14-16)
The recorded voice is saved to Sounds & Ringtones
Data Folder.
APress c and select Tools → Voice
recorder
To change the fixed recording time ( P.1417)
BPress c (Record)
CPress w (Stop) or continue
recording until the set time runs out
14
Tools
DAs required, press c (Play) to
replay
To pause
Press c (Pause)
To resume
Select Options → Record
14-17
Item
Playing Voice
Description
Replay a voice file saved in Data Folder.
Send
Send a file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
APress c and select Tools → Voice
recorder
Set as
Set voice for ringtone, etc.
BSelect Options → My sounds
Lock/Unlock
Set/release file protection.
CHighlight the file and press c
(Play)
Details
Confirm recorded sound file size,
etc.
Record settings
Select the file name assigned
automatically or the fixed recording
time ( P.14-17).
Delete
Delete a recorded voice file.
Rename
Change file name.
Voice Recorder Options
14
Tools
Operate listed below from Options before and after
recording. Options and selectable items vary by the
conditions. For more information about available
options after selecting My sounds, see "Data Folder
Options" ( P.11-14).
Item
Description
Record
Start recording.
My sounds
Call up list of sound files saved in
the My sounds folder.
14-18
Changing Voice Recorder
Settings
Default Name
Default
Setting
■
Voice
The voice recorded with Voice recorder is saved
under a name such as "Voice 001." "Voice" can be
changed to another word.
APress c and select Tools → Voice
recorder
BSelect Options → Record settings →
Default name
CEnter a name
APress c and select Tools → Voice
recorder
BSelect Options → Record settings →
Recording time
CSelect a duration and press c
(Save)
World Clock
World clock allows you to check the current time all
Tip
■
5 minutes
Tools
Recording Time
Default
14
over the world.
• If the default name is changed
The naming rule is applied from the next recording.
Viewing World Clock
APress c and select Tools → World
clock
Setting
14-19
Selecting Areas
Default
Current time and city name of
■
Tokyo, Seoul for both areas
Setting
Current time and city name of
When you save a second time zone, easily check the
time at that area looking at World clock.
APress c and select Tools → World
clock
BUse j to highlight area 1 and use
s to change city name
14
Tools
To set summer time
aPress o (DST )
bCheck the area to set summer time and press
w (Done)
CPress c (Save)
14-20
Using Calculator
To erase a symbol in a mathematical
expression
Arithmetic operations to a maximum of 13 digits can
Place cursor after a symbol to erase and press
be performed.
APress c and select Tools →
Calculator
To erase both the mathematical expression
BCalculate
To enter numbers
Press keys
and the calculation result
Press C for 1+ seconds
Converting Currencies or
Units
To enter ＋, −, ×, or ÷
Convert the currencies for various countries.
Press r, l, u, or d
Alternatively, convert the units of length, weight, etc.
14
Tools
To display the calculation result
Press c
To enter ., (, or )
Press w (.( )) to toggle symbols
To move cursor left or right
Press * or #
14-21
Converting Currencies
APress c and select Tools →
Converter → Currency
Original currency
Enter the amount in original
Target currency
Converted amount appears
CSelect Original currency amount field
and enter the amount
To enter a decimal point
Press *
DSelect Target currency field and the
currency
EView the result in the target currency
To check the exchange rate
14
BSelect Original currency field and the
currency
Tools
To replace the original currency with the
target currency
Press o (Reverse)
aHighlight either of Currency fields and press
w (View Rate)
bPress C to return to the Original window
To change the exchange rate
aHighlight either of Currency fields and press
w (View Rate)
bSelect the base currency to change the rate,
highlight the currency, select Options → Edit
cEnter the rate and press c (Save)
14-22
To add a currency unit
aPress w (View Rate)
bSelect Options → Add Rate
cEnter the currency unit/rate and press c
(Save)
CSelect Original unit field and select
the unit
To replace the original unit with the target
unit
Press o (Reverse)
Converting Units
APress c and select Tools →
Converter
BSelect Length, Weight, Volume, Area,
or Temperature
DHighlight Original unit value field
and enter the value
To enter a decimal point
Press *
To enter/delete "-" when converting
14
temperature
Original unit
Enter a value in original unit
Target unit
The converted value appears
ESelect target Unit field and select the
unit
14-23
Tools
Press #
FView the result in Converted value
field
To clear the values
Press w (Clear)
Stopwatch
708SC can be used as a stopwatch for measuring a
maximum of ten lap times plus the total time.
14
APress c and select Tools →
Stopwatch
Dictionary
Look up English/Japanese dictionaries.
APress c and select Tools →
Dictionary
BSelect a dictionary
To use English dictionary
Select English dictionary
To use Japanese dictionary
Select Japanese dictionary
Tools
BPress c (Start)
CEnter a word to search
CPress c (Lap) to measure a lap
time or w (Stop) to stop time
measurement
DSelect a target word
14-24
Interpreter
DSelect the phrase
To set by your voice
Use 708SC Interpreter as a translator to find
Speak the phrase for inquiry to 708SC after the
frequently used phrases in particular places (such as
beep
an airport), through voice prompts in each language.
Available languages are English, Korean, and
Chinese. Select place name or the phrases using keys
or your voice.
APress c and select Tools →
Interpreter
BSelect the language
To set by your voice
Speak the item in menu to 708SC after the beep
To set by keys
Use a to highlight the item and press c
Press w (メニュー ) to select the item
EHighlight the phrase and press c
To listen the phrase
Press w (音を聴く)
To listen the phrase again
Press w (リピート)
14
Tools
CSelect an item
To set by keys
Tip
• To play voice prompts
After Step 3, press o (ボイスオン)
• When もう一回言って下さい appears
708SC could not recognize your voice. Speak clearly
again or say another phrases.
14-25
14-26
Advanced Functions
Calling Functions
Auto Redial
Default
■
Off
• When Retry with is set for Video Call
Automatic redialing settings take priority.
• When receiver has activated Voice Mail or Call
Forwarding
The call is forwarded and automatic redialing is
canceled.
Setting
Set to automatically disconnect a Voice/Video Call
International Dial
initiated to a party that is busy and redial the same
party soon. Automatic redialing repeats up to 10
times until y is pressed or 708SC is closed.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings→ All calls → Auto redial
15
Advanced Functions
BSelect a value and press c (Save)
Tip
International Prefix
Default
■
010
Setting
Set the international code frequently used when
initiating an international phone call.
APress c and select Settings→ Call
settings → Voice call → International
dial→ Int'l prefix
BEnter an international code
15-2
Editing Country Codes
To add or change
aHighlight the item to add or change and press
Default
Setting
■
1: Japan 2: KOR 3: GBR 4: ITA 5:
CHE
6: ESP 7: DEU 8: PRT 9: NLD 10:
FRA
11: MCO 12: USA 13: SWE 14: AUS
15: CHN 16: HKG 17: TWN
18 to 20: Unused
Add a country code or delete an unnecessary one.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice call → International
dial → Country codes
country name
cHighlight Country code, enter code and press
w (Save)
To delete
Highlight item to delete, press w (Delete) and
select Yes
Earphone call
Default
Setting
■
■
Earphone call activate: Off
Call number: No list
15
When Earphone call is set to On, press switch for 1+
seconds to call specified number.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice call → Earphone call
15-3
Advanced Functions
BPerform operations to add, change,
or delete
c (Change)
bSelect Country name field and enter the
BSelect Earphone call activate
CSelect the setting
DHighlight Call number and perform
operations to save phone number
To enter a phone number directly
aPress c (Select) and select Direct input
bEnter phone number
To select a phone number from Phonebook
aPress c (Select) and select Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
cHighlight phone number and press c
15
Advanced Functions
(Select)
15-4
To enter a phone number using Call Log
aPress c (Select) and select Call log
bSelect the log record
EPress w (Save)
Tip
• To delete a phone number
a Perform Step 1
b Press c (Select) and select Direct input
c Press C for 1+ seconds press c
• To change a phone number
a Perform Step 1
b Perform Step 4
c Press c (Save)
Handling Incoming Calls
Anykey Answer
Default
■
Off
Setting
Acoustic Shock
Default
■
On
Setting
To avoid 708SC starts to ring at high volume, even
when high Ringtone volume for Voice Call/Video
Answer Voice Calls using keys other than c
Call is set, Acoustic shock enables 708SC starts to
(Accept) or t.
ring at Level 1 volume for the first two seconds, then
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Anykey answer
at the set volume.
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → All calls → Acoustic shock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
15
Advanced Functions
• Answering a Voice Call when On is set ( P.2-3)
15-5
Active Folder
Default
■
Off
Setting
When On, open 708SC to answer an incoming call.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Active folder
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
Side Key Silence/Reject
Default
15
■
Silence
Setting
Advanced Functions
Use n or b to mute ringer or reject an incoming
call. Select from Reject (disconnect the call) or
Silence (silence the incoming tone).
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Side key
15-6
BSelect a value and press c (Save)
Side Key Lock
Simple Search Setting
With this function set to On, Side Keys of 708SC are
Default
locked. Avoid accidental key presses when 708SC is
Setting
placed inside a bag, etc.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Side key lock
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
■
Off
When Simple search is set to On, enter numbers in
Standby to search Phonebook entries starting with
Reading name corresponding each number. Then
search result (entry names and phone numbers) list
appears.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings → Simple search
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
15
Advanced Functions
Tip
• To initiate calls using Simple search ( P.5-11)
15-7
Idle Shortcuts
Up to nine frequently used functions can be saved;
create own Shortcut Menu. In Standby, press u to
access functions saved to shortcuts.
APress u
BHighlight unsaved function entry box
and press c (Assign)
CSelect the function
15
DRepeat Steps 2 and 3 to save the
function
Advanced Functions
15-8
Tip
• To change functions
a In Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Assign
b Select Yes and select the function
• To sort functions
a In Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Change Order
b Use a to highlight the target function box and
press c (Select)
• To delete functions
In Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Delete → Yes
• To restore defaults
In Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Reset → Yes
Memory Status
Check the following information:
• Available shared memory
• Status of SMS and S! Mail mailboxes
• Status of memory in Data Folder
• Status of Calendar items registered
• Status of Phonebooks (Handset and USIM Card)
Alternatively, delete saved entries and/or files.
APress c and select Settings →
Memory settings → Memory status
BSelect an item to check
Tip
• To delete the contents
When the contents in Data Folder, Calendar or
Phonebook are to be deleted
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Highlight an item, press c (Select), select Yes
and view an entry
c Check the fields to delete, press w (Delete) and
select Yes
• To delete all contents
After Step c in "To delete the contents," enter Phone
Password, press c (Confirm) and select Yes
• To check/uncheck all contents at once
After Step c in "To delete the contents," select
Options → Mark all or Unmark all
15-9
15
Advanced Functions
• When the checked contents contain the contents
that functions or locks are set in
After Step c in "To delete the contents" or the "To
delete all contents" operations, the confirmation
window appears. If you select Yes, the deletion is
performed. If you select No, only files without
functions or locks set are deleted.
15-10
Optional Services
Optional Services
The following optional services are available with
708SC:
Service
* This service requires a separate subscription.
Optional Services
When you know you will be unable to
answer calls to 708SC, automatically
divert calls to a specified number.
Voice Mail
Divert all or all unanswered calls to Voice
Mail Center; access caller messages via
708SC from within the service area or via
a touchtone phone anywhere.
Call Waiting*
A tone sounds for incoming calls when
the line is engaged.
Put the line on hold to answer or alternate
between lines.
Conference
Call*
Open another line while one is engaged;
toggle lines or talk on all simultaneously.
Add new parties to an existing
conference; talk on up to five lines
simultaneously.
Call Barring
Restrict incoming or outgoing calls by
condition.
16-2
Description
Description
Call
Forwarding
16
Service
Caller
Show or hide your own number when
Identification placing calls.
Note
• When Out appears, access services from a
touchtone landline. For details, contact Customer
Service ( P.25-25).
Call Forwarding
Activating Call Forwarding
Set forwarding condition and number, by call type
Specify a forwarding number beforehand.
(Voice Call or Video Call), beforehand, to divert
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice call or Video call →
Diverts
incoming calls to a specified number.
Forwarding
Condition
Description
Always
708SC does not ring/vibrate for incoming
calls; calls are diverted automatically and
Missed Call does not appear.
BSelect No reply or Always; view the
current settings
Optional Services
No reply
Unanswered calls are diverted after the
specified ring time, or when the line is
busy or 708SC is out-of-range.
When the settings are acceptable
After viewing, press l to return to the
previous window
Note
• Call Forwarding and Voice Mail cannot be used at
the same time.
16
• Activating Call Forwarding cancels Voice Mail.
• Call Forwarding is not available when All outgoing
calls or All incoming calls in Call Barring is active
(Call Barring takes priority over Call Forwarding).
16-3
CHighlight Forwarding address field
and enter a number
To select a phone number from Phonebook
aHighlight forwarding Address field and
select Options → Phonebook
bSelect Phonebook, highlight a phone number
and press c (Select)
Optional Services
16
DFor No reply, highlight Waiting time
field and set a time
EPress c (ON)
Tip
• When Call Forwarding (No reply) is active
While 708SC rings/vibrates, answer a call or press o
(Busy) to forward it.
Cancel All
Cancel all Diverts services at once.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice call or Video call →
Diverts → Cancel all
Tip
• To stop Call Transfer service for each forwarding
condition
a Press c and select Settings → Call Settings →
Voice call or Video call → Diverts
b Select No reply or Always
c Press w (OFF)
Check Status
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice call or Video call →
Diverts → Check status
16-4
Voice Mail
Forward an incoming Voice Call to Voice Mail
Center or a specified number based on preset
forwarding conditions ( P.16-3).
Note
• Voice Mail and Call Forwarding cannot be active at
the same time.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice mail
BSelect No reply or Always
CFor No reply, highlight Waiting time
field and set a time
DPress c (ON)
Tip
• When Voice Mail (No reply) is active
While 708SC rings/vibrates, answer a call or press o
(Busy) to forward it.
Optional Services
• Activating Voice Mail cancels Call Forwarding.
• Voice Mail is not available when All outgoing calls
or All incoming calls in Call Barring is active (Call
Barring takes priority over Voice Mail).
Activating Voice Mail
16
16-5
Canceling Voice Mail
Listening to Messages
Cancel all Voice mail services at once.
When a caller saves a message at Voice Mail Center,
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice mail → Cancel all
in standby, a message appears. Also,
appears at
the top of Display.
Tip
Optional Services
16
• To cancel Voice Mail by forwarding condition
a Press c and select Settings → Call settings →
Voice mail
b Select No reply or Always
c Press w (OFF)
Checking Settings
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice mail → Check status
Notification
１２
１5
１5 30
While Message Appears
Connect to Voice Mail Center as described below
and follow voice prompts.
APress w (Dial)
To check message details
Press c while message appears
16-6
Tip
• To access caller message from overseas
a Press 0 for 1+ seconds and enter +
b Enter 819066514170 and press t
Incoming Call Notification
AEnter 1414 and press t (Free of
charge)
• To delete a message without listening to it
Press o (End).
When setting from a general subscriber
• To clear
Voice Mail indicator disappears when messages are
accessed via 708SC.
Dial 090-665-1414 and press t
AEnter 1416 and press t
Incoming Call Notification
When setting in overseas (Charged)
Press 0 for 1+ seconds, enter +, enter 8190-665-14191 and press t
Optional Services
While No Message Appears
phone in Japan (Free of charge)
BPerform operations following the
audio prompts
If there was a call that could not be answered because
you were out of service area or handset was powered
16
off, it is notified with SMS. It is also notified when a
caller saves a message at Voice Mail Center while
you are talking to other party.
16-7
Call Waiting*
Receiving a Second Call
* A separate subscription is required to use this
When there is an incoming call during a call, you are
service.
notified with a specific interrupt sound and display.
This service is only available for Voice Calls.
Place the current call on hold and answer the second
call.
Activating or Canceling
Optional Services
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Voice call → Call waiting
BActivate or cancel the service
To activate
Press c (ON)
To cancel
Press w (OFF)
16
AWhen you hear the interrupt sound,
press c (Accept)
BSelect Hold active call
To end the current call and answer the
second call
Select End active call
CPress w (Swap) to toggle the calls
DTo end the current call, press y
To end the call on hold
Select Options → End → Held call
16-8
To end both calls at once
Select Options → End → All calls, or close
708SC
New Call
When the called party is connected, the party that has
been connected is placed on hold.
Tip
• When the other party ends the call and you have
another call waiting
Press w (Retrieve) to talk to the waiting party.
Conference Call*
* A separate subscription is required to use this
To use Phonebook
aPress c (Search) and select Phonebook
bHighlight the phone number and press
c (Select)
To use a log
Press t, open logs and highlight the entry
BPress c (Call) and talk with the
connected party
Optional Services
• When the Call Transfer service or Voice Mail
service is active
When the second call is not answered, it is forwarded
to a forwarding destination or Voice Mail Center.
When the forwarding condition is set to Always, the
Call Waiting service is not available.
ADuring a call, select Options → New
call and enter number
16
service.
Talk with a maximum of six parties simultaneously.
16-9
Engaged Conference Call
Operations
ACall another party during a call
( P.16-9)
BPress w (Swap) to switch connected
calls
Optional Services
16
Tip
• To end the call on hold
During a call, select Options → End → Held call
• To end all calls
During a call, select Options → End → All calls, or
close 708SC
• When the current caller ends the call while using
Conference Call service
A party on hold remains on-hold state. Switch to the
on-hold party to talk.
16-10
Join
ADuring a call, initiate a call to
another party ( P.16-9)
BSelect Options → Join
Tip
• To call with only one person
During a call, select Options → Split and select a caller
to talk to
• To end the call for a specific caller
During a call, select Options → End → Select
participant, check callers to end and press w (End)
• To end the all calls
During a call, press y
• When one party ends the call during Conference
Call
Continue talking with remaining parties.
When setting restrictions, you are required to enter
Call Barring
Network Password (The 4-digit number dedicated to
Use this service to bar outgoing/incoming calls for
Outgoing/incoming service specified at the
Voice/Video Calls, sending/receiving SMS under the
subscription).
conditions listed below.
Item
All outgoing
calls
Deactivates initiating
Outgoing Intl international calls and SMS
sending within your current
calls
location.
Intl except
home
Restrict
incoming
calls
Deactivates initiating
international calls and SMS
sending within your current
location or except Japan.
Note
• If incorrect Network Password is entered three
consecutive times, setting or canceling the Call
Barring service is deactivated. Note that, in this
case, change Network Password and Center Access
code. For more information, contact Customer
Service ( P.25-25).
• When the Call Transfer service or Voice Mail
service is active, you cannot use All outgoing calls or
All incoming calls (Call Transfer service or Voice
Mail service takes priority).
16
All incoming Deactivates reception of all
calls
calls and SMS receiving.
Incoming
when
roaming
Optional Services
Restrict
outgoing
calls
Description
Deactivates initiating calls
and SMS sending, except
emergency calls.
Deactivates reception of all
calls and SMS receiving
while outside of Japan.
16-11
Tip
• When an attempt is made to initiate a call while
calls are restricted
A message appears indicating that outgoing call
restriction is active. The message may appear after a
while depending on the area where using 708SC.
Restrict Outgoing/Incoming
Calls
Optional Services
Restrict outgoing calls and/or Restrict incoming calls
16
BSelect Voice call, Video call, or SMS
and select a restriction type
DSet or cancel call barring
To set
Press c (ON)
To cancel
Press w (OFF)
Tip
• To check settings
Perform Steps 1 and 2. After checking the settings,
press C to return to the previous window.
for each type of call (Voice/Video Calls, SMS)/
transmission.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Call barring
CEnter Network Password
16-12
Cancel All
Canceling outgoing and incoming call is available
for each of call types (Voice and Video Calls, SMS)/
transmission.
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Call barring
BSelect Voice call, Video call, or SMS
→ Cancel all
CEnter Network Password and press
Caller ID
Show or hide your own phone number when calling
from 708SC.
Show My Number
Changing Network Password
BEnter the current Network Password
in Old field and new Network
Password
(4 digits) in New and Cnf (Confirm)
field, then press c (Confirm)
■
By network
Setting
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → All calls → Show my
number
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
Optional Services
APress c and select Settings → Call
settings → Call barring → Change
password
Default
16
• When set to By network
Automatically set to Show/Hide your number by
current network status.
16-13
Adding 186 or 184
Use 186 (Show ID) or 184 (Hide ID) prefixes to
show or hide your number when calling from 708SC,
regardless of the Show my number setting.
AEnter Show ID or Hide ID Prefix
To show Caller ID
Press 186
Optional Services
16
To hide Caller ID
Press 184
BEnter phone number
CPress t
To initiate a Video Call
Select Options → Video call
16-14
Receiving & Sending Messages
Getting Started
17
S! Mail
Receiving & Sending Messages
Use this service to send/receive long text messages,
images, videos, other files, and sounds between S!
Tip
• Retry function
If the other party's handset cannot receive a message
because the power turned off or out-of-range, 708SC
keeps the message saved on Mail Server; then send to
the other party after signal reception recovers stable.
Mail compatible SoftBank handsets and PCs via email.
Checking for New
Messages
A separate subscription is required to use S! Mail and
receive e-mail.
When a message is received in Standby mode,
SMS
reception notification appears. The number of
Use this service to send/receive short text messages
received messages, senders and reception dates/times
between SMS-compatible SoftBank handsets using
appear.
phone numbers.
Number of received messages
Sender
相田名都
１２
１5
１5 30
Reception date and time
Reception Notification Window
17-2
APress w (View)
Tip
Received Message List
When multiple messages appear
Use s to select the
tab and press w
(View)
BSelect a new received message
２００６年 １２月１５日 １８：１５
Ｆｒｏｍ：相田名都
会議の場所と時間が決ま
りましたのでお知らせし
ます。
場所：５階第３会議室
時間：１４：００
• Received message count
When there are unread messages, the total number of
new and unread messages appears.
• Sender information
A phone number or mail address appears. When the
sender has been saved in Phonebook, you will see the
name saved in Phonebook. When an incoming image
has been saved in Phonebook or an incoming image
has been set for the group, the image appears at the
same time. While Secret Mode is set to Hide and
Phonebook Secret Mode is set to On for message
receiver/sender information; sender's name/image does
not appear.
Operations in SMS window
SMS Window
S! Mail Text
In SMS window, press Side Keys nb to enlarge/
reduce text font size. Alternatively, press u or d
17-3
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
• When a message is received (out of Standby mode)
or appears on the top of Display. When 708SC is
closed, an icon like
appears on Sub Display ( P.110,
1-12). The icon does not appear with Sub LCD light
( P.8-9) set to Off.
for 1+ seconds to auto scroll. To stop auto scroll, press
any key. Press r or l to adjust the scroll speed.
17
3D Pictogram ( P.20-5)
Receiving & Sending Messages
By default, when you check an incoming/unread
message (Except S! Mail that is set for Slide Show or
with an attachment), the message text appears in 3D
Pictogram. After 3D Pictogram display ends or w
(Stop) is pressed, Message window appears. Perform
various operations after Message window appears.
Retrieving Complete Messages
When Home network ( P.20-3) or Roaming ( P.203) is set to Manual, S! Mail is temporarily stored on
Mail Server; part of the received message is sent to
708SC as a reception notification. Retrieve complete
messages from Mail Server.
APress w and select Received msgs
17-4
BSelect a message with the rest of it
受信
Notification Details
CPress c (Retrieve)
DSelect complete message
• To retrieve complete messages from Message list
window ( P.19-2)
Message window for S! Mail with an
attachment
The first page shows the file name for the attachment
and the second and subsequent pages show the message.
Use r to read the message or select Options → Play
to start Slide Show.
Message window for S! Mail with Slide Show
set
Message Window
Select Options → Play to play the slide. During
playing, press c (Pause)/w (Stop) to pause/stop it.
Use s to manually select pages.
17-5
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
日付：
2006 年 １２月 １５日 15：00
Ｆｒｏｍ：
090XXXXXXXX
本文：
家に新しい家族が加わりま
した。ご紹介します。
Tip
• Received Message list window indicators
: Unread reception notification (Priority: High)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Low)
: Read reception notification (Priority: High)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Low)
Message window for S! Mail with an inserted
file ( P.17-17, 17-18)
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
If an image is inserted, the image appears with the
message.
If sound is inserted, select Options → Play to play
sound.
If Slide Show is set, sound is played when the page with
an inserted sound appears.
If video is inserted, select Options → Play and press
o (Video) to play video.
If Slide Show is set, Video appears at the lower right
and pressing o (Video) plays sound when the page
with an inserted video appears.
Message window with a file requiring
purchasing/obtaining Content Key
appears on a page with an inserted file that you
cannot view/play.
Select Options → Download content key to view/play
the file.
Using Received Messages
Send a message directly to the sender.
17-6
APress w (Reply) on the Message
window
BCreate a message and press w
(Send)
Tip
• Subject display of S! Mail for replies
The subject of a replied S! Mail is prefixed with "RE:"
automatically.
Creating Messages
Two types of messages are available on 708SC: S!
Mail and SMS. The number of characters that can be
sent and entry items are different between these types
(Shown below).
SMS
Maximum of 70
single- byte/
double-byte,
Katakana
characters
Maximum of 160
single-byte
alphanumerics
(Up to 140 bytes)
consecutively like slides or with a background color
( P.17-12, 17-15, 17-18).
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
Number of
characters that
can be sent
S! Mail
Approximately
10,000 singlebyte/double-byte
characters1
Approximately
10,000 characters
in one slide2
(Up to 300K
bytes3)
Address
Yes
Yes
Entr
Subject
Yes
No
Attachme
item
Yes
No
nt
Yes: Available
No: Not available
1 The number of characters that can be sent varies by the
attachment size, etc.
2 Set a maximum of 20 slides in one message.
3 Total size of all kinds of messages (Including address,
subject, text, and attachments).
Using the Mail Art Function
When displaying an S! Mail window, use mail art
function to display text messages and/or images
17-7
Tip
Procedures
17
Mails should be created in the flow as shown below.
Receiving & Sending Messages
• To set sending options beforehand ( P.20-2, 20-5)
Items other than Destination should be entered as
Automatic Change of Message Type
required.
When message creation is started, the message type is
set to SMS; it automatically changes to S! Mail when
one of the following occurs:
• Entering mail address as a destination
• Entering a subject
• Entering characters exceeding the number of
characters that can be sent by SMS
• Inserting files on Slide Show page
• Attaching or inserting a file
• Changing the address type to Cc or Bcc
When the message is modified to allow it to be sent as
SMS, for example, by deleting an attached or inserted
file or a subject, the message type automatically
changes to SMS.
Depending on message creation conditions, it may not
automatically change type. If the mail type is not
changed automatically, change it manually ( P.17-12).
Creating S! Mail
Creating SMS
Enter an address (
Enter a subject (
P.17-8)
P.17-11)
Enter message text (
P.17-11)
Attach/Insert files
( P.17-15, 17-18)
Set any sending options (
Send the message (
17-8
P.17-12)
P.17-12)
BEnter an address
Address
Enter a phone number or mail address for S! Mail or
to twenty addresses can be entered.
APress w and select Create msg
To select an address from Phonebook
17
aSelect Address field and select From
Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
cHighlight a phone number or mail address
Address field
Subject field
Attach field
Message field
Text entry field
Message Creation Window
and press c (Select)
To enter an address directly
aSelect Address field and select Enter
Recipient
bEnter phone number or mail address
To select an address from sent records
Select Address field and select the record
To select an address from a Phonebook
Category
aSelect Address field and select From
Category
17-9
Receiving & Sending Messages
a phone number for SMS as a message address. Up
bSelect a Category, with/without Address
selection window, highlight an address to
17
enter and press c (Select)
CTo enter another address
To enter an address directly
Receiving & Sending Messages
aSelect Address field
bSelect Entry field and select Enter Recipient
cEnter phone number or mail address and
press w (Done)
To select an address from Phonebook
aSelect Options → Add recipients →
Phonebook
bSearch and select Phonebook
cHighlight a phone number or mail address
and press c (Select)
To select an address from a Phonebook
Category
aSelect Options → Add recipients →
Category
bSelect a Category; with/without Address
selection window, highlight an Address to
enter and press c (Select)
17-10
Tip
• To create a message using a template ( P.17-14)
• To add an address after confirming the entered
address
a In Step 3, select Options → View recipient list
b Select Entry field and perform operation in the
same way as Step 2
c Press w (Done)
• To send a message after confirming the entered
address
a In Step 3, select Options → View recipient list
b Select Options → Send
• To change the address type to To, Cc, or Bcc
a In Step 3, select Options → View recipient list
b Select Options, highlight an address → Change
recipients → To, Cc, or Bcc
• To delete an address
a In Step 3, select Options → view recipient list
b Select Options, highlight an address → Remove
• Displaying Address field
When multiple addresses have been saved,
and the
number of addresses appear in Address field on
Message creation window.
Note
• If the free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15)
on 708SC is less than 464K bytes, you cannot create
a message. To create a message, delete unnecessary
messages.
• If the shared memory ( P.25-15) becomes low
while in a message creation, you may not be able to
save the message in Drafts.
• A message created on 708SC may not appear the
same way on the other party's phone.
• Message sent with Subject/Text in Hangul, may
appear as spaces or be deleted on the other party's
phone.
17-11
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
• To confirm the entered address
In Step 3, select Options → Recipient list
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
Subject
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
AIn Message creation window, select
Subject field
BEnter a subject
Tip
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
Message
AIn Message creation window, select
Message field
When Slide Show is set ( P.17-12)
Select Text entry field
BEnter the message
17-12
Tip
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
• To use an SMS template or Phonebook entry
( P.4-11)
• To change the font size of characters being entered
In Step 2, select Options → Font Size → Small,
Standard, or Large
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
• To set Slide Show ( P.17-12)
• To insert image files, etc. in a Message field
( P.17-15, 17-18)
• To view the text in 3D Pictogram
In Message creation window, highlight Message field,
select Options → 3D Pict. Disp.
Sending a Message
Tip
• To set sending settings for a message being created
a In Message creation window, select Options →
Sending options
b Select an item and make settings ( P.20-2, 20-5)
c Press w (Apply) or w (Save)
• To change the message type
a In Message creation window, highlight all fields
except Address field
b Select Options → Change to S! Mail or Change to
SMS → Yes
17
messages, images, movies, and sounds can be
inserted on each page of Slide Show. Set a maximum
of 20 slide pages in one message.
AIn Message creation window, select
Options → Insert → Text
メール作 成
Slide page No. and display
time
Added Text entry field
Message Creation Window
BSelect added Text entry field and
enter a message
CTo add a Text entry field for Slide
Show, perform Steps 1 and 2
17-13
Receiving & Sending Messages
AIn Message creation window, press
w (Send)
Slide Show
Display S! Mail window in Slide Show. Text
Tip
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
• To insert Image, Sound, or Video
Perform operations in "Inserting a File" ( P.17-17).
Alternatively, other files can be inserted in the same
page. But image/video or sound/video cannot be
displayed in the same page.
• To delete a Text entry field
a In Message creation window, highlight Text entry
field
b Select Options → Remove → Yes
• To preview Slide Show before sending
a In Message creation window, highlight a field other
than Address field
b Select Options → Preview
c Select Options → Play
Changing the Style of Message
Field
Set the font color, font style, interval time for
displaying Slide Show, background color, etc.
AIn Message creation window,
highlight Message field
BSet options as required
To set background color
aSelect Options → Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Background colour and use a to
highlight a color
Set the page display
aHighlight a Character entry field to set
bSelect Options → Edit style
cHighlight Slide interval and enter a time
Set the font color
aSelect Options → Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Font colour and use a to
highlight a color
17-14
Set a font color for a single slide page
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
aHighlight a Character entry field to set
bSelect Options → Edit style
cHighlight Order item and use s to display
highlight a color
Set font size for all pages
aSelect Options → Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Font Size and use s to display a
size
Text-Top or Image (Video)
CPress c (Save)
Tip
• To preview the style before sending
a In Message creation window, highlight a field other
than Address field
b Select Options → Preview
c Select Options → Play
To set font size for a single slide page
aHighlight a Character entry field to set
Note
bSelect Options → Edit style
• If the type of message being created is SMS, Edit
style or Preview does not appear in Options.
cHighlight Font Size and use s to display a
size
To change the display order for text and
Templates
images (Videos)
Create and send a message using S! Mail or SMS
aSelect Options → Edit style
template.
17-15
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
cHighlight Font colour and use a to
17
APress w and select Templates →
S! Mail templates or SMS templates
Receiving & Sending Messages
BHighlight an S! Mail or SMS
template
CSelect Options → Send
DCreate a message and press w (Send)
Tip
• To use after viewing an S! Mail template
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Select Options → View
c Select Options → Play as required
d Select Options → Edit and send
• To register a template ( P.4-16, 18-19)
Attaching/Inserting Files
A file that can be attached/inserted to an S! Mail is
limited in size to 294K bytes (except the message
17-16
address, subject and message text size). Up to 20
files can be attached to one S! Mail.
Tip
Note
• Note that some recipients may not be able to receive
attachment or inserted files.
field, display/play the file when you view the
Message window.
17
Attaching a File
AIn Message creation window, Select
Attach field
BPerform operations to attach
• Video files that cannot be sent by S! Mail (File size:
over 294K bytes, Size: over 176 x 144, Quality: other
than Economy, or etc.) are attached/inserted, the
message indicating attaching/inserting failed
appears.
Attaching/Inserting a File from
Data Folder, etc. into Message
Field
Attach field
Attachment name
Message Creation Window
(File Attached)
To attach file
aSelect Data Folder
Attach images, video, and/or sounds saved in Data
bSelect a file from Data Folder
Folder to a message, as well as any contents saved in
To attach Phonebook data as vCard file
Phonebook and Calendar (converted as vCard format
format
or vCalendar format). If you insert a file in Message
aSelect Phonebook details
17-17
Receiving & Sending Messages
• To check the size of a message being created
Select S! Mail as the Type of the message, the message
size appears in the upper-right corner.
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
17
cPress w (Add)
Receiving & Sending Messages
To attach Calendar items as vCard file
format
aSelect Calendar item
bSelect the items
• To replace a file
a In Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options → View attachment
b Highlight a file and select Options → Replace
c Perform Step 2 in "Attaching a file" ( P.17-16)
• To delete a file
a In Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options → View attachment
b Highlight a file and select Options → Remove →
Selected
Tip
• To add a file
Perform Step 1 to 2 in "Attaching a file" ( P.17-16)
• To check an attachment
a In Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options → View attachment
b Select a file
• If you attach a file
An icon indicating the file type and the file name is
displayed in Attach field.
: Image
: Sound
: Video
: vCalendar
: vCard
: File other than above
• To delete all files
a In Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options → View attachment
b Select Options → Remove → All → Yes
Inserting a File
AIn Message creation window, select
Options → Insert
To insert a file with Slide Show set ( P.17-12)
aIn Message creation window, highlight Text
entry field to insert a file
bSelect Options → Insert
17-18
BSelect the file to insert
Tip
• To preview an inserted file
a Select Options → Preview
b Select Options → Play
Message Creation Window
(File Inserted)
To insert an image
aSelect Image
bSelect an image from Data Folder
To insert sound
aSelect Sound
bSelect sound from Data Folder
To insert a video
aSelect Video
bSelect movie from Data Folder
• If you insert a file
In Message creation window, the icon indicating the
file type, file name, and file size is displayed in Text
entry field. If you inserted an image with no
restrictions on its being displayed, the image will be
shown in reduced size instead of the icon.
: Images that cannot be displayed because of
Content Key has not been purchased or otherwise
obtained
: Sound
: Video
• To replace a file
a In Message creation window, highlight a file in Text
entry field
b Select Options → Replace
c Select a file, an entry, or a calendar item
• To delete a file
a In Message creation window, highlight a file in Text
entry field
b Select Options → Remove → Yes
17-19
Receiving & Sending Messages
Inserted file name
17
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
• To insert a file where another file has already been
inserted
A new Slide Show page is added automatically and the
file is inserted. In case of an image file and sound file,
both can be inserted on the same page.
BSelect a creation method and insert
the file
To capture a photograph
aSelect Take picture
bPress c (Take)
Creating & Inserting a File
While creating a message, create a file and insert it.
The file inserted to Message field is displayed/played
when Message window is opened.
AIn Message creation window, select
Options → Create & Insert
To insert a file with Slide Show is set
aIn Message creation window, highlight Text
entry field where a file to be inserted
bSelect Options → Create & Insert
17-20
cPress c (Add)
To record video
aSelect Record video
bPress c (Record)
cPress c (Save)
dSelect Options → Add to message
To record sound
aSelect Record sound
bPress c (Record)
cPress w (Stop)
dSelect Options → Add to message
Tip
Saving Created Messages
17
Save to Drafts
• To insert a file where another file has already been
inserted
708SC works the same way as the file inserted from
Data Folder to Text entry field ( P.17-18).
perform other operations, save the message being
• To replace or delete a file
Perform operations the same way as the file inserted
from Data Folder to Text entry field ( P.17-18).
AIn Message creation window, select
Options → Save to Drafts
• Operations activated before and after capturing a
still image ( P.7-6)
• Operations activated before and after recording
video ( P.7-11)
• Operations activated before and after recording
sound ( P.14-18)
When temporarily stopping message creation to
created to the Drafts.
Tip
• When C / y / l is pressed on Message
creation window
When C, y, or l is pressed after entering
something or attaching or inserting a file, a message
appears asking whether to finish creating the message.
Select Yes to save the created message to Drafts.
17-21
Receiving & Sending Messages
• If you insert a file
708SC works the same way as the file inserted from
Data Folder to Text entry field ( P.17-18).
Note
17
Receiving & Sending Messages
• Only when any of addresses, subject, and text is
entered or a file is attached/inserted, Save to Drafts
appears in Options.
Save as a Template
By saving a message with fixed contents, etc. as an
S! Mail templates, new S! Mail can be easily created
and sent.
AIn Message creation window,
highlight Attach field or Text entry
field
BSelect Options → Save as template
Note
• Saved as template appears in Options only when a
subject is entered or the message is longer than
SMS, or when a file is inserted.
17-22
Messaging Folders
Viewing Messages
Five mailboxes are created on 708SC.
18
Mailbox
Message type
Messaging Folders
Received msgs
Received messages.
Drafts
Message drafts saved before
completion.
Unsent msgs
Messages unsent because of failure or
cancellation, or waiting to be sent.
Sent msgs
Messages already sent.
Templates
S! Mail or SMS saved as templates.
Tip
Note
• When adding a new SMS to Drafts, Unsent msgs, or
Sent msgs cause the maximum number of allowed
message to be exceeded, the oldest SMS is deleted
automatically.
Message Lists
From list of Received msgs or Unsent msgs, view the
messages.
APress w
BSelect Received msgs or Unsent msgs
• To check message memory status
a Press w
b Select Memory status
c Select SMS, S! Mail (By count), or S! Mail (By size)
• To create a personal folder in Received msgs
( P.18-15)
Received Message List
18-2
To check from a personal folder in Received
msgs
Select a folder; then Phone Password entry window
appears, enter Phone Password and press c
Message List Window
The following information appears in lists for each
Messaging folder.
18
CSelect a message
Messaging Folders
Message type icon
Sender or recipient
Reception date
(Confirm)
Subject or the top of the message
Message size
Tip
• In Message window, press * or #
Switch between previous and next window.
Information icon of copyrighted file
Received Message List
• When pressing Side Keys nb in SMS window
Press Side Key n to enlarge font size by two levels;
press Side Key b to reduce font size by two levels
• To view a sent message
a In Step 2, select Sent msgs
b Highlight a message, select Options → View
• To view S! Mail details
In Step 3, highlight a message, select Options →
Details
18-3
Tip
18
Messaging Folders
• Received Message Indicators
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: High)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Standard)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Low)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: High; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Standard; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Low; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: High)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Standard)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Low)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: High; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Standard; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Low; Video and/or sound
inserted)
18-4
: Unread reception notification (Priority: High)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Low)
: Read reception notification (Priority: High)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Low)
: Unread SMS
: Read SMS
: Unread SMS (saved in USIM Card)
: Read SMS (saved in USIM Card)
: Unread S! Mail Delivery Report
: Read S! Mail Delivery Report
: Unread SMS Delivery Report
: Read SMS Delivery Report
: Receiving S! Mail
• Draft Message Indicators
: S! Mail (Priority: High)
: S! Mail (Priority: Standard)
: S! Mail (Priority: Low)
: S! Mail (Priority: High; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: S! Mail (Priority: Standard; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: S! Mail (Priority: Low; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: SMS
• Sent Message Indicators
: S! Mail
: S! Mail (Video and/or sound inserted)
: SMS
: SMS (saved in USIM Card)
• Copyrighted file indicators
Attached/inserted copyrighted file indicators
: Transferable, Content Key has already been
purchased
: Transferable, Content Key has not been purchased
or otherwise obtained
: Nontransferable, Content Key has already been
purchased
: Nontransferable, Content Key has not been
purchased or otherwise obtained
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide
Phonebook Secret Mode is set to On for message
receiver/sender information; only the number or email
addresses appear (instead of the name).
Message Window Operations
Saving to Phonebook
Save the phone number/mail address of the sender/
18
recipient to Phonebook while displaying Message
Messaging Folders
• Unsent Message Indicators
: S! Mail
: S! Mail (Video and/or sound inserted)
: SMS
: Sending S! Mail
window (Received)/Reception notification window.
AIn Message window, select Options →
Add to Phonebook → Phone or USIM
BSelect New or Update
To save as a new entry
Select New
To save to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
CSelect an icon
DSave other items ( P.5-4)
18-5
EPress w (Save)
Note
18
Messaging Folders
• When an underlined phone number, mail address
or URL is highlighted on a message window, Add to
Phonebook does not appear in Options.
Note
• While displaying S! Mail sent from a PC or other
devices, Add to S! Mail template does not appear in
Options.
Message Window Options
Saving as an S! Mail Template
Item
Description
Save received or sent S! Mail as an S! Mail template.
Play
Play Slide Show, inserted video, or
sound ( P.17-5).
AIn Message window, select Options →
Save as S! Mail template
Retrieved
Receive subsequent part of the notified
message.
Reply
Reply to the sender of the reception
notification.
Reply to all
Send reply to all entered S! Mail
recipients.
Forward
Forward received message.
Download
content key
Purchase or acquire Content Key.
Delete
Delete displayed messages.
Tip
• If a message appears indicating name duplication
a Press c
b Press c (Select) and enter the name
c Press w (Save)
• When a name entry window has opened
a Press c (Select) and enter the name
b Press w (Save)
18-6
Save as S! Mail Add displayed S! Mail as an S! Mail
template
template ( P.18-6).
Item
Description
Save files attached or inserted in an S!
Mail to Data Folder ( P.18-14).
Add to
Phonebook
Save number or mail address to
Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook
( P.18-5).
Details
Confirm S! Mail size, etc.
3D Pict. Disp.
Display a message in 3D Pictogram
( P.20-5).
Move to Phone/ Move an SMS received or being sent
USIM
to handset or USIM Card ( P.18-18).
Replying to a Message
APress w and select Received msgs
BHighlight message, select Options →
Reply
CCreate a message and press
w (Send)
Tip
18
• The subject of message replies
The subject of an S! Mail reply is prefixed with "RE:"
automatically.
• While Reply with text is set to On
Under two line breaks, received message text is
automatically entered in Text entry field.
Note
• If free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15) on
708SC is less than 464K bytes, you cannot reply to a
message. To reply to the message, first delete
unnecessary messages.
To reply to all recipients entered in the S!
Mail
Highlight message, select Options → Reply to
all
18-7
Messaging Folders
Item copy
Forwarding a Message
Forward a received or sent message to another
18
recipient.
Messaging Folders
APress w and select Received msgs or
Sent msgs
BHighlight message, select Options →
Forward
CCreate a message and press
w (Send)
Note
• If free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15) on
708SC is less than 464K bytes, you cannot forward
a message. To forward the message, first delete
unnecessary messages.
Sending from Drafts
APress w and select Drafts
BHighlight the message and press
w (Send)
When Send does not appear
aPress c (Edit)
Tip
• The subject of forwarded messages
The subject of a forwarded S! Mail is prefixed with
"FW:" automatically.
18-8
bEnter address and press w (Send)
Sending from Unsent
Messages
Send messages directly from Unsent Messages.
BHighlight the message and press
w (Send)
To send after modifying
aHighlight the message, select Options →
Edit
bEdit the message and press w (Send)
Deleting a Message
Deleting Specified Message(s)
Delete multiple specified messages. Alternatively,
specify and delete saved templates.
APress w
To delete a saved S! Mail or SMS templates
Select Templates → S! Mail templates or SMS
templates
18
CDelete a Message or Template
To delete one message or template
aHighlight the message or template
bSelect Options → Delete → Selected → Yes
To delete multiple messages or templates
aSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
bCheck a message or template to delete
cRepeat b to check all of the target messages
or templates
dPress w (Delete) and proceed to f when
all are not checked
eEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm)
fSelect Yes
18-9
Messaging Folders
APress w and select Unsent msgs
BSelect a mailbox
Tip
18
Designating & Deleting a
Mailbox
Messaging Folders
• To view the contents of multiple messages or S!
Mail templates while selecting them
a Repeat Steps 1 and 2
b Select Options → Delete → Multiple
c Highlight message or S! Mail template, select
Options → View
APress w to select Settings → Delete
all
• To collectively select/deselect multiple messages or
S! Mail templates
a Repeat Steps 1 and 2
b Select Options → Delete → Multiple
c Select Options → Mark all or Unmark all
CRepeat Step 2 to check all target
mailboxes
• To collectively select/deselect multiple SMS
templates
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Select Options → Delete → Multiple
c Press o (Mark all) or o (Unmark all)
Note
• While highlighting an S! Mail template designated
as default, Delete does not appear in Options.
18-10
BCheck a mailbox to delete
DPress w (Delete)
EEnter Phone Password, and press
c (Confirm) to select Yes
Deleting All Messages from a
Mailbox
Delete saved templates all at once.
BSelect a mailbox
To delete an S! Mail or SMS template
Select Templates → S! Mail templates or SMS
templates
• You cannot delete the S! Mail template designated
as the default.
Linked Information
If Message window or Notification details window
CSelect Options → Delete → All
contains an underlined number, mail address, or
DEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
send messages, save bookmark, or access the site.
URL; save it to Phonebook or use it to place a call,
As linked information, following number of
characters can be recognized for each S! Mail Font
size setting:
Maximum of 45 lines (1,035 characters) for
Standard,
54 lines (1,026 characters) for Large, and 41 lines
(1,025 characters) for Small.
18-11
18
Messaging Folders
APress w
Note
• Personal folders cannot be deleted by this
operation. To delete Personal folders, perform the
following operations: Messaging → Settings →
Delete all
Saving to Phonebook
18
Messaging Folders
AIn Message window, select a phone
number, mail address, or URL and
select Add to phonebook → Phone or
USIM
BSelect saving method to create a new
entry or update an existing entry
To save as a new entry
Note
• When you select a URL, you cannot select USIM in
Step 1.
Saving as a Bookmark
AIn Message window, select a URL and
select Bookmark
BPress c (Select) to enter a subject
and press w (Save)
Select New
To save to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
CSelect an icon
DSave other items ( P.5-4)
EPress w (Save)
18-12
Initiating a Call, Sending a
Message, or Accessing the Web
Use phone number/mail address/URL information in
Message window or Notification details window.
AIn Message window, take procedures
down below
To initiate a Voice Call
Select a phone number and select Voice call
To initiate a Video Call
To send a message
aSelect a phone number or mail address and
select Create msg
bCreate a message and press w (Send)
To access the Web
Select URL and select Go to URL
Tip
• Operations in Notification details window
Phone number/mail address/URL information except
in From (other party's phone number) can be used.
Viewing an Attachment
Open images/play sounds attached to S! Mail. For
18
vCard/vCalendar, open Details to see contents.
Messaging Folders
Select a phone number and select Video call
Using an Attachment
ASelect a file and select Open file
Tip
• To save a file in Data Folder directly
In Message window, select a file → Save items
• To save vCard/vCalendar to Phonebook/Calendar
directly
In Message window, select a file → Register to
Phonebook or Register to Calendar
• To register vCard/vCalendar to Phonebook/
Calendar after viewing
a Perform Step 1
b Press c (Register)
18-13
18
• When a file requiring Content Key is attached
If you perform Step 1, a message appears and you
cannot open the file. To view the file, select Save items
in Step 1 to save and purchase/obtain Content Key
from Data Folder ( P.11-14).
Messaging Folders
• When an attachment has a restriction (only one
time playback allowed)
When you perform Step 1, a message appears notifying
you that only one time playback is allowed).
Saving Attachments to Data
Folder
Save S! Mail attachment/inserted files to 708SC.
AIn Message window, select Options →
Save items
BPerform file selection operation
To select and save one file
bPress c (Select) or select Options →
Selected
To select and save multiple files
aSelect Options → Multiple
bCheck the files to save
cRepeat b to check all target files
dPress w (Save)
To save all files
Select Options → All
Tip
• To select or deselect multiple files at once
a In Step 2, select Options → Multiple
b Press o (Mark all) or o (Unmark all)
• When a popup message appears indicating the file
name is a duplicate while saving
a Press c
b Press c (Select) and change the file name
c Press w (Save)
aHighlight a file
Note
18-14
• When a file is highlighted in Message window, Save
items does not appear in Options.
Managing Folders
BSelect Options → Edit folder
CEnter a name
Security ON/OFF
18
Set Security setting for a personal folder; require
and save in the folders for each mail types. Set own
Phone Password entry to check messages in the
security setting for personal folders.
personal folder.
Create Folder
APress w and select Received msgs
BSelect Options → Create folder
CEnter a name
Edit Folder
Change name for personal folders.
APress w and select Received msgs
APress w and select Received msgs
BHighlight the personal folder, select
Options → Security ON/OFF
CEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm), then select Yes
Tip
• Folder with Security setting
appears indicating Security setting has been
selected.
18-15
Messaging Folders
Create personal folders in Received msgs; organize
• With Security settings On
Select personal folders; Phone Password entry window
appears. Enter Phone Password and press c;
Message list window in the personal folder appears.
Moving Messages
APress w and select Received msgs
18
To move messages in personal folder to
Messaging Folders
another personal folder
Select a personal folder
BHighlight message, select Options →
Move this
CSelect the destination folder
To resent messages to Received msgs
Select Received msgs
18-16
Delete Folder
APress w and select Received msgs
DSelect saving method to create a new
entry or update an existing entry
To save as a new entry
To select personal folder with Security setting
Select New
On
To save to an existing entry
Enter Phone Password and press c (Confirm)
CSelect Yes
aSelect Update
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
From Message List
ESelect an icon
Saving to Phonebook
FEnter additional items as required
( P.5-4)
APress w and select Received msgs,
Unsent msgs or Sent msgs
GPress w (Save)
BHighlight message, select Options →
Add to Phonebook
18-17
18
Messaging Folders
BHighlight the personal folder, select
Options → Delete folder → Yes
CSelect a phone number or mail
address and select Phone or USIM
Sorting Messages
18
To display messages separately by message
type
Messaging Folders
Available sorting types to display vary by Message
Select Message type
list window of the mailbox.
To sort by subject
AIn Message list window, select
Options → Sort by
Select Subject
BSelect an item
To sort in descending order of date
Select Date
To sort by sender
Select Sender
To sort by recipient
Select Recipient
To display read and unread messages
separately
Select Unread to read or Read to unread
18-18
To sort in descending order of message size
Select Size
Tip
• Listing order when selecting Message type
Listed in the order of SMS → S! Mail (Including
message notification) → SMS saved in USIM Card.
• Listing order when selecting Sender, Recipient, or
Subject
Listed in the order of single-byte symbol → singlebyte number → single-byte alphabet → single-byte
Katakana → double-byte symbol → double-byte
Hiragana → double-byte Katakana → Kanji →
double-byte number → double-byte alphabet. But if
Subject is selected, messages with no subject are listed
at the top.
Move to Phone/Move to USIM
Move received SMS or sent SMS.
Save up to ten messages to USIM Card.
BMove messages
To move from USIM Card to 708SC
aHighlight an SMS saved on USIM Card
bSelect Options → Move to phone
To move from 708SC to USIM Card
18
• To move received SMS in personal folder to USIM
Card
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to
complete the move.
Saving an S! Mail Template
aHighlight an SMS saved in USIM Card
For more information about saving an SMS template,
bSelect Options → Move to USIM
see "SMS Templates" ( P.4-16).
APress w and select Templates →
S! Mail templates
BSelect Options → Add new
18-19
Messaging Folders
APress w and select Received msgs or
Sent msgs
Tip
• Message List SMS Indicators
: Unread SMS
: Read SMS
: Unread SMS (USIM Card)
: Read SMS (USIM Card)
: Sent SMS
: Sent SMS (USIM Card)
CSelect Subject field or Text entry field
and enter a subject or message
18
DPress w (Save)
Messaging Folders
Tip
• To view an S! Mail template being created
In Step 3, select Options → Preview
• To display and view an S! Mail template
In Step 2, highlight S! Mail template, select Options →
View
• To modify an S! Mail template
a In Step 2, select a registered S! Mail template and
perform modification operation
b Press w (Save)
• To delete an S! Mail template
Perform the same operation as for a message ( P.189).
• To change the font size of characters being entered
a In Step 3, select Text entry field, select Options →
Font Size
b Select any of Small, Standard, or Large
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
• Setting Slide Show/inserting a file
a In Step 3, select Options → Insert or Create &
Insert
b Perform setting, attaching, or inserting operation
( P.17-13, 17-18, 17-20)
• To view the text in 3D Pictogram
In Step 3, highlight Text entry field, select Options →
3D Pict. Disp.
Message List Options
Item
Description
Retrieve complete S! Mail from the
Server.
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
Retrieve
• To use contents of an SMS template or Phonebook
( P.4-11)
Reply
Reply to the sender ( P.18-7).
Reply to all
Send reply to all entered S! Mail
recipients ( P.18-7).
18-20
Item
Description
Forward received message ( P.18-8).
Move this
Move received mails to a personal
folder ( P.18-16).
Create folder
Create a personal folder ( P.18-15).
Edit folder
Change personal folder name ( P.1815).
Security On/Off
With Security setting On, enter Phone
Password to check mails in a personal
folder ( P.18-15).
Delete folder
Delete a personal folder ( P.18-16).
View
Open sent messages or S! Mail
templates ( P.18-3, 18-19).
Edit
Edit unsent message ( P.18-8).
Delete
Delete messages or templates ( P.189, 18-11).
Move to phone/
Move to USIM
Move SMS between 708SC and
USIM Card ( P.18-18).
Sort by
Sort messages ( P.18-17).
Add to
Phonebook
Save number or mail address to
Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook
( P.18-16).
Item
Description
Details
Check memory status in a personal
folder or confirm S! Mail size, etc.
Cancel
retrieving
Stop message retrieval from Mail
Server.
Send
Send message using S! Mail template
or SMS template ( P.17-15).
Add new
Save a new S! Mail template or SMS
template ( P.4-16, 18-19).
18-21
18
Messaging Folders
Forward
18-22
Server Mail
Message List
View messages stored on the Mail Server in a list
form. Retrieve, forward, or delete messages.
19
Acquire Mail List
Server Mail
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Acquire Mail List
Tip
• To check Mail Server usage state
a Select Server mail volume in Step 2
b Press c (Update) and select Yes to update to the
latest information
19-2
Download
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Mail List
CHighlight the message, select Options
→ Download
Tip
• To receive all messages from Message list window
In Step 2, select Retrieve All Mail
Delete
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Mail List
CDelete unwanted messages
aHighlight a message
bSelect Options → Delete → Selected → Yes
aSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
bCheck a message to delete
cRepeat b to check all target messages to
delete
dPress w (Delete) and go to f if unmarking
all
19
Server Mail
To delete one message
To delete multiple messages
eEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm)
fSelect Yes
To delete all messages
aSelect Options → Delete → All
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm)
and select Yes
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple messages at once
a Perform Steps 1 and 2
b Select Options → Delete → Multiple
c Select Options → Mark all or Unmark all
19-3
Remote Forward
To directly enter an address
Forward a message from the Mail Server to another
aSelect Entry field and select Enter Recipient
address. Contents except the address are sent without
bEnter a phone number or mail address
modification.
19
DEnter an address
APress w and select Server mail box
To enter an address using a log
Select Entry field and select a displayed log
Server Mail
BSelect Mail List
entry
CHighlight message, select Options →
Remote Forward
aSelect Entry field and select From
To select an address from Phonebook
Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
cHighlight a phone number or mail address
and press w (Select)
To select an address from Category of
Phonebook
aSelect Entry field and select From Category
19-4
bSelect a Category, with/without an Address
selection window, highlight an address and
press w (Select)
ESelect Options → Send
Tip
• Message subject
The subject of a forwarded message is prefixed with
"FW:" automatically.
• To delete an address
In Step 5, highlight a recipient, select Options →
Remove
• To change the address type to To, Cc, or Bcc
a In Step 5, highlight a recipient, select Options →
Change recipients
b Select any of To, Cc, or Bcc
19-5
19
Server Mail
• To set other sending options for a message being
created
a In Step 5, select Options → Sending options
b Select an item and perform operations to set
( P.20-2)
c Press w (Apply)
19-6
Other Message Settings
Customizing Handset
Address
set sending options separately for each S! Mail to
send
Change your mail address (alphanumerics before @)
( P.17-13).
used for sending and receiving S! Mail to/from PC,
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Sending options
etc. The default account name consists of random
alphanumerics.
20
Set options related to sending S! Mail. Alternatively,
Other Message Settings
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Mail Address setting
BFollow onscreen instructions
S! Mail Settings
Sending Settings
Default
Setting
Priority: Normal ■ Expiration: Maximum
■ Delivery: Immediately
■ Request delivery report: Unchecked
■
BSelect an item and set
Message priority
aSelect Priority
bSelect a level and press c
Retention period (before expire) on the Mail
Server
aSelect Expiration
bSelect an item and enter a time if you
selected Custom time (Hour)
cPress c
Retention period (before delivery) on the
Mail Server
20-2
aSelect Delivery
bSelect an item and press c
Delivery report request
Check Request delivery report
CPress w (Save)
■
Roaming network: Manual
Set options related to receiving S! Mail.
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Receiving options
Tip
20
Other Message Settings
• When the retention set in Expiration expires
The S! Mail is deleted automatically from the Mail
Server.
• When retention is set in Delivery
When the specified time has elapsed, the S! Mail is
sent from the Mail Server.
• When Request delivery report is checked
When an S! Mail is sent from the Mail Server, a
distribution report is sent to your handset.
Receiving Settings
Default
■
Home network: Manual
Setting
20-3
BSelect an item and set
Message Size
To set the receiving method to use in Japan
20
aSelect Home network
Default
bSelect an item and press c
Setting
■
300KB
Other Message Settings
To set the receiving method while overseas
Deactivate sending messages exceeding the specified
aSelect Roaming network
size.
bSelect an item and press c
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Message size
CPress w (Save)
Tip
• The contents of Home network and Roaming
network are:
Auto download: Receive automatically.
Manual: Receive only reception notification.
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Default Style
Default
Setting
Font color: Black ■ Font size: Large
Background color: White
■ Slide interval: Custom time (3 seconds)
■
■
Set font color, font style, background color, and Slide
Show time intervals. Alternatively, change display
settings for each S! Mail sent ( P.17-14).
20-4
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail →Default style
BSet options
SMS Settings
Default
Setting
■
■
Delivery report: Unchecked
Character support: Automatic
Font color
aSelect Font color
bUse a to highlight a color and press c
To set a font size
Set options related to sending SMS. Alternatively, set
options for each SMS to send ( P.17-13).
APress w and select Settings → SMS
bSelect an item and press c
BSet options
Background color
aSelect Background color
bUse a to highlight a color and press c
Slide Show time intervals
aSelect Slide interval
bSelect an item, with Custom time, enter a
time
cPress c
Request a delivery report
Check Delivery report
Change the character set of fonts used in the
text
aSelect Character support
bSelect an item and press c
CPress w (Save)
CPress w (Save)
20-5
20
Other Message Settings
aSelect Font Size
BSet options
Tip
• When Delivery report is checked
When an SMS is sent from the Mail Server, a
distribution report is sent to your handset.
3D Pictogram Settings
20
Default
Setting
Other Message Settings
Display type: New mails only
■ Background: Pattern 1
■ Running Speed: Normal
■
3D Pictogram is a function that allows you to display
in 3D animation for words, pictograms, or emoticons
Whether to use 3D Pictogram
aSelect Display type
bSelect an item and press c (Save)
Background pattern and font colors
aSelect Background
bPress s, display the pattern and press
c (Save)
To set a display speed
aSelect Running speed
bSelect an item and press c (Save)
in message text.
Activate or deactivate 3D Pictogram or set the
background color and display speed.
APress w and select Settings →
3D pictogram
20-6
Tip
• The contents of Display type are:
Always: Use 3D Pictogram when viewing every
message.
New mails only: Use 3D Pictogram only when viewing
an unread message received.
OFF: Not use 3D Pictogram.
Note
• Such as file-attached/Slide Show set S! Mail may
not appear properly in 3D Pictogram.
Reply with text
Default
■
Off
Setting
20
Other Message Settings
When creating reply message, set to include received
message text.
APress w and select Settings → Reply
with text
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Tip
• The contents of Reply with text are:
On: Reply with text including received message text.
Off: Reply with text not including received message
text.
20-7
Mobile Internet
Getting Started
Web
From a handset, access to Yahoo! Keitai and the Web
to browse various sites or download images, sounds,
etc.
A separate subscription is required to use the Web.
Accessing from the Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu
21
From the Yahoo! Keitai main menu, select a menu
Mobile Internet
items to access various contents.
authentication. Confirm electronic certificates saved
on 708SC ( P.22-14, 23-4).
SSL/TLS Precautions
When a security notice appears, subscribers must decide
for themselves whether or not to open the page.
Opening secure pages constitutes agreement to the
terms of usage. SOFTBANK MOBILE Corp., VeriSign
Japan K.K., Betrusted Japan Co., Ltd., and Entrust
Japan Co., Ltd. are not liable for damages associated
with SSL/TLS use.
Cache
Retrieved Mobile Internet pages are temporarily
Internet Accessing
saved here. Cache remains even after a session ends
Enter a URL and access pages.
or 708SC is turned off. When full, oldest pages are
automatically deleted to make room for new ones.
SSL/TLS
When a saved page is opened again, it may open
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer
from Cache. For the latest version, reload the page
Security (TLS) are encryption protocols for secure
( P.22-13).
Internet transmissions of important/sensitive
information (credit card numbers, etc.) and
21-2
Tip
• To manually delete Cache contents ( P.23-4)
• When another USIM Card is inserted into 708SC
Cache contents are automatically deleted.
• When a page with an expiry date is saved
Page is automatically deleted upon expiry.
Getting Online
Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu
Access Mobile Internet sites via Yahoo! Keitai main
menu
APress o
Alternatively, press o for 1+ seconds
Yahoo! Keitai menu appears. Select Yahoo!
21
Keitai to open Yahoo! Keitai main menu.
Tip
• When accessing Mobile Internet for the first time
After Step 1, Time & date settings window appears; set
time & date to display Information window.
21-3
Mobile Internet
BSelect an item
Enter URL
Page Window Operations
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Enter URL
Operations on pages are as follows.
BSelect URL field and enter a URL
Scroll bar appears when page content extends
CPress w (Go to)
beyond current view.
Scrolling
ニュース（速報）
くじらの化石を発掘
Tip
21
Mobile Internet
• To save the entered URL as a bookmark
a In Step 2, check Add bookmark
b Select Title field and enter title
c Press w (Go to)
• To access a page from the access history ( P.22-11)
d/r/b
×× 県○○市のビル工事現場
で、約３００万年前のくじらの化
石を発見。
戻る
×× 県○○市のビル工事現場
で、約３００万年前のくじらの化
石を発見。
化石の特徴から、
△△くじらの
一種ではないかとみられてい
る。
化石の特徴から、
△△くじらの
一種ではないかとみられてい
る。
○○市ではこれまでにくじら
の化石が１０体発掘されている
くじらの化石を発掘
u/l/n
○○市ではこれまでにくじら
の化石が１０体発掘されている
が、今回発見されたのは他の
ものよりも５０万年ほど古いと
戻る
Scroll bar
d/r: Scroll down by one line
When a horizontal scroll bar appears, use r to
scroll right
u/l: Scroll up by one line
When a horizontal scroll bar appears, use l to
scroll left
21-4
Side Key b: Scroll page down by multiple lines
When the page is already scrolled to the top,
Side Key n: Scroll page up by multiple lines
alternatively, press Side Key n to move cursor up
Moving Cursor
Tip
When selecting an item such as link, move cursor to
that item.
ニュース
１．国内のニュース
Cursor
d/r
ニュース
１．国内のニュース
２．海外のニュース
２．海外のニュース
３．政治
３．政治
４．経済
５．スホ゜ーツ
６．その他
選択
21
６．その他
戻る
選択
d/ r: When items are listed vertically, move
cursor down
ニュース
１．国内のニュース
ニュース（スポーツ）
１．野球
２．海外のニュース
２．サッカー
３．政治
３．ゴルフ
４．経済
Mobile Internet
戻る
u/l
• When you move cursor
The selected item is highlighted or enclosed in a frame
of dotted lines if it is link to another page.
Previous or Next Page
４．経済
５．スホ゜ーツ
• When items are listed in the same row
Press s to move cursor right or left.
４．その他
５．スホ゜ーツ
When the page is already scrolled to the bottom,
alternatively, press Side Key b to move cursor
down
u/ l: When items are listed vertically, move
cursor up
６．その他
戻る
選択
w (Back)/
戻る
選択
Highlight link, etc. and press c: Display the next
page
Alternatively, select Options → Forward to
change the window
21-5
w (Back) or C: Display the previous page
Tip
• If w (Back)/C is pressed with no previous
page displayed
A message appears asking whether to terminate the
Web connection; select Yes to terminate the Web
connection.
Text Entry/Item Selection
An information window may show fields and items
given below.
21
お名前
Mobile Internet
性別
男
aText entry field
bRadio
cMenu field
女
住所
アンケート（複数選択可）
初めて購入した
dCheck box
もう一度購入したい
友達にも薦めたい
送信
戻る
キャンセル
eCommand
選択
a Text entry field
Enter data, certification passwords, etc.; highlight
Text entry field, press c and enter text
21-6
b Radio button
Note
Select only one of the selection items. Highlight an
item with
and press c to select it (Appearing as
• The appearance of text entry or item selection
varies by page opened.
).
Using Linked Info
c Menu field
Display a menu and select an item. Highlight a menu,
press c to display the menu. Use j to highlight
the item and press c to select the item. When
multiple items can be selected for Menu field, press
C to cancel multiple selections.
Use phone numbers, mail addresses, and URLs
contained on an page to initiate calls, create and send
messages, and access other pages.
Available phone numbers, mail addresses, and URLs
are underlined.
Select any number of selection items. Highlight an
item with
and press c to select it (Appearing as
). To deselect a selected item, highlight
21
Mobile Internet
d Check box
and
press c.
e Command button
Perform operations assigned to a button such as send
or reset. Highlight a command button and press c
to execute the operation.
21-7
Using Page Links
AOpen a page containing linked info
BUse the available links
To initiate a Voice Call
Select a phone number and select Voice Call
BSelect a number or address and select
Save Number or Save Address →
Phone or USIM
CCreate a new entry or update an
existing entry
To create and send messages
To save as a new entry
aSelect a phone number or mail address and
Select New
select Create message
bCreate messages and press w (Send)
aSelect Update
Mobile Internet
To add to an existing entry
21
To access another page
bSearch for an existing entry to modify ( P.5-
Select a URL
9)
Saving to Phonebook
DSelect an icon
AOpen a page with linked number or
address
ESave the item ( P.5-4)
21-8
FPress w (Save)
21-9
21
Mobile Internet
21-10
Mobile Internet Files
Using Image Files
Saving Page Images
Save a page image to Data Folder.
Saving Images to Data Folder
AOpen a page with an image
Saving Linked Images
BSelect Options → Save → Save image
Download and save images from page links.
AOpen a page containing an image link
CHighlight the image and press
c (Save)
BSelect link
DPress C
To open the image
22
When details appear
Press c (Launch)
Mobile Internet Files
CPress c
Press c
To set saved image as Wallpaper
DPress C
To open the image
Press c (Launch)
To set saved image as Wallpaper
Press w (Set) and perform Step 3 in
"Wallpaper" ( P.22-3)
22-2
Press w (Set) and perform Step 3 in
"Wallpaper" ( P.22-3)
EPress C to end the operation
To save another image
Repeat Step 3
Tip
• If the same file name exists
a Press c (Edit) and change the file name
b Press w (Save)
• Viewing images
Press w (Set as) to set Wallpaper. ( P.22-3).
Press c (Zoom) to enlarge or reduce the image.
Press
o (Details) to view image details.
• When SVG-T/SWF format file is saved
Options appears on the save image confirmation
window, then select Options and execute various
operations
( P.11-9).
Wallpaper
Set a saved image as Wallpaper.
AOpen image to set as Wallpaper
( P.22-2)
BPress w (Set as)
CSelect an item
To set as Wallpaper
aSelect Wallpaper
bPress c (Set)
22
entries
aSelect Caller ID
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.59)
cPress c (Set)
To set as outgoing image
aSelect TV call Still picture
22-3
Mobile Internet Files
To set as incoming image for Phonebook
bPress c (Save)
Note
• For SVG-T/SWF format file, Settings does not
appear. For Wallpaper, open Data Folder and open
an image ( P.11-9).
Using Sound Files
Playing Sound
Play sounds from page links.
AOpen a page containing link
22
BSelect link to sound
Mobile Internet Files
22-4
Saving Sound Files to Data
Folder
Download sound files from page links and save them
Saving Sound Being Played
Save sound played in the background while viewing
a page.
to Data Folder.
AOpen a page with sound
AOpen a page containing a sound link
BSelect Options → Save → Save sound
BSelect link
CPress C
CPress c
When details appear
Press c
Press c (Launch)
To set saved sound as Ringtone
22
Press w (Set as) and perform Step 3 in
"Setting Sound File as Ringtone" ( P.11-12)
To play sound
Select Launch
22-5
Mobile Internet Files
DSelect Exit
To play sound
Tip
• If same file name exists
a Press c (Edit) and change the file name
b Press w (Save)
• To play sounds
Press w (Set as) and set saved sound as Ringtone
( P.11-12). For other operations, refer to Media
Player ( P.10-3).
Using Video Files
Playing a Video
Play video from a page link.
AOpen a page containing a video link
BSelect link
Options
The items listed vary by the window status.
Item
22
Stop
Description
Stop playing.
Mobile Internet Files
Access a page containing a
View bookmark streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Details
Confirm sound size, etc.
Player settings
Select settings related to Media
Player ( P.10-7).
22-6
Saving Videos to Data Folder
Download and save videos from page links.
AOpen a page containing a video link
BSelect link
CPress c
When details appear
Press c
DPress C
To play video
Item
Press c (Launch)
To set saved video as Ringtone
Press w (Set as) and perform Step 3 in
"Setting Video File as Ringtone" ( P.11-12)
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Details
Set video display size while playing
or paused.
Player settings
Select settings related to Media
Player
( P.10-12).
Tip
• If same file name exists
a Press c (Edit) and change the file name
b Press w (Save)
Streaming
22
Enjoy audio visual media while it downloads. Access
Options
The items listed vary by the window status.
Item
Resolution
Description
Set video display size while playing
or paused.
compatible files via page links, etc. Downloaded
content cannot be saved.
AOpen a page containing a streaming
video link
BSelect link
22-7
Mobile Internet Files
• To play video
Press w (Set as) and set saved video as Ringtone
( P.11-12). For other operations, refer to Media
Player ( P.10-9).
Description
Access a page containing a
View bookmark streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
Item
Tip
• To stream files
Operate the same as Media Player ( P.10-3, 10-9).
Note
• Even when use of streaming is temporarily stopped,
communications continue, so packet
communication fees continue.
Options
The items listed vary by the window status.
Item
22
Description
Mobile Internet Files
Resolution
Set video display size while playing
or paused.
Add bookmark
During accessing, save a page
containing a streaming play link as
a bookmark.
Access a page containing a
View bookmark streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
22-8
View history
Description
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Saving Pages
Saving a Page
Save a displayed page and open it at any time
without accessing the Web. Up to 50 pages can be
saved.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options → Saved pages → Save
Opening a Saved Page
Change Title
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Saved pages
BHighlight a page, select Options →
Rename
CPress c (Edit) and change the
name
DPress w (Save)
22
Mobile Internet Files
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Saved pages
BSelect a page
22-9
Deleting a Saved Page
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Saved pages
BDelete as required
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple pages at once
a In Step 2, select Options → Delete → Multiple
b Select Options → Selected/All
Saving Bookmarks
To delete one page
aHighlight a page
bSelect Options → Delete → Selected → Yes
To delete multiple pages
aSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
22
bCheck a page to delete
Mobile Internet Files
cRepeat Step b to check all target pages
Saving an Address as a
Bookmark
By saving the Web addresses (URLs) of frequently
used pages as bookmarks, access those pages. Up to
30 URLs can be saved as bookmarks.
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
AOpen a page
To delete all pages
BSelect Options → Bookmarks → Add
to Bookmarks
aSelect Options → Delete → All
bEnter Phone Password, press w (OK) and
select Yes
22-10
CCheck the title and URL
To change the title/URL
aSelect Title or URL field
bChange a title or URL
Tip
• To send a bookmark URL in a message
a In Step 2, highlight a bookmark, select Options →
Send URL
b Create a message and press w (Send)
DPress w (Save)
Editing Bookmarks
Tip
• To manually enter and save a bookmark
a Press c and select Yahoo! Keitai → Bookmarks
b Select Options → Add bookmark
c Select Subject field and enter a subject
d Select URL field and enter a URL
e Press w (Save)
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Bookmarks
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Bookmarks
BHighlight a bookmark, select Options
→ Edit bookmark
CSelect Title field or URL field, and
modify the title or URL
DPress w (Save)
BSelect a bookmark
22-11
22
Mobile Internet Files
Opening a Bookmark
Modify the title or URL of bookmark.
Deleting a Bookmark
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Bookmarks
BDelete as required
To delete one bookmark
aHighlight a bookmark
bSelect Options → Delete → Selected → Yes
To delete multiple bookmarks
aSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
22
bCheck a bookmark to delete
Mobile Internet Files
cRepeat b to check all target bookmarks
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
To delete all bookmarks
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple bookmarks at once
a In Step 2, select Options → Delete → Multiple
b Select Options → Selected/All
History
The history records up to 50 URLs of accessed
pages. Using the history, access pages previously
accessed.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
History
BUse the history
To access a page from the history URL
aSelect Options → Delete → All
Select URL
bEnter Phone Password, press w (OK) and
To delete a history URL
select Yes
22-12
aHighlight the URL
bSelect Options → Delete → Selected → Yes
To delete multiple histories
aSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
bCheck a history to delete
cRepeat b to check all target histories
Display Settings
Rendering
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
Default
To delete all histories
Setting
aSelect Options → Delete → All
bEnter Phone Password, press w (OK) and
select Yes
Tip
Standard
Set pages to match Display size or show only text.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options → Rendering
CSelect an item
22
To display a page without changing its layout
Select Wide
To display a page to fit Display
Select Standard
To display only page text
Select Simple
22-13
Mobile Internet Files
• To select/deselect multiple histories collectively
a In Step 2, select Options → Delete → Multiple
b Select Options → Selected/All
■
Search Text
ADisplay information window
BSelect Options → Search text
CSelect Text entry field and enter the
word
DSelect the searching direction and
press w (Search)
22
Copy Text
Mobile Internet Files
ADisplay information window
BSelect Options → Copy Text
CIn a text entry window, select Options
→ Copy
22-14
DUse a to move cursor on the first
character and press c (Start)
To copy all texts in text entry window
Press o (All) to copy
EUse a to specify the range and
press c (End)
Reload
AOpen a page
BSelect Options → Reload
Page Details
Server Certificate
View current page information including URL and
View server certificates of a page using a SSL/TLS
page title.
connection.
AOpen a page
AOpen a secure page
BSelect Options → Browser setting →
Page details
BSelect Options → Browser setting →
Certificates
Send URL
Attach the URL of the current page to a message and
send it.
BSelect Options → Send URL
22
Tip
Mobile Internet Files
AOpen a page
CSelect Server certification and select a
certificate
• When you open a page that uses SSL/TLS
appears on the top of Display.
CCreate a message and press w
(Send)
22-15
Returning to Default Page
Return to the Yahoo! Keitai main menu.
AOpen a page
BFrom any page, select Options →
Yahoo! Keitai
Item
Forward
Description
Move to the next information window
( P.21-5).
Bookmark
Add or open bookmarks ( P.22-9).
Saved pages
Save information windows to Saved
pages. Display information window from
Saved pages ( P.22-8, 22-8).
Text search
Search text in information window
( P.22-13).
Reload
Reload the information for a page
( P.22-13).
Enter URL
Enter a URL to open another site/page
( P.21-4).
AOpen a page
Rendering
Change the displaying method for pages
( P.22-15).
BSelect Options → Browser setting →
Encoding
Copy text
Copy text in information window
( P.22-13).
Save
Save images and sounds to Data Folder
( P.22-2, 22-4).
Encoding
Default
22
Information Window Options
■
Auto
Setting
Mobile Internet Files
If page text appears garbled, change character
encoding.
CSelect an option and press c (Save)
22-16
Item
Description
Item
Description
Send URL
Send URLs of a page in a message
( P.22-14).
Manufactur Set whether to notify a Web site of your
e No.
handset's serial number.
History
Access a page you have already visited
( P.22-11).
Encoding
Yahoo! Keitai
Return to the Yahoo! Keitai main menu
( P.22-15).
Browser
setting
Make detailed settings for Web Browser.
Text size
Change the character codes set for the
page currently displayed ( P.22-15).
Java Script Set Java Script on/off ( P.23-3).
About
browser
View detailed information about the
browser.
Set text size in information window
( P.23-3).
Download Set various settings for image/sound
downloads ( P.23-2).
Delete all information from the cache.
Empty
cookies
Delete all cookies (tokens left by various
Web sites on your handset).
Cookie
options
Activate or deactivate cookies.
22
Mobile Internet Files
Empty
cache
Certificate
View the certificate ( P.22-14, 23-4).
Page
details
View the detailed information about a
page ( P.22-14).
22-17
Other Web Settings
Preferences
Default
Security
■
Display images: Checked
■
Play sound: Checked
Default
Set 708SC to deactivate embedded images/sounds
Setting
Cookie Options
Setting
■
Accept all
when opening pages. Pages download more quickly
Activate or deactivate Cookies that allow
without image and sound data.
information providers to automatically record
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
information identifying handset user. User
Browser settings → Downloads
BPerform operations to set
23
To deactivate images
Other Web Settings
bSelect an item and press w (Save)
aSelect Display images
information, access date, and other information are
saved in Cookies.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings → Cookie options
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
To deactivate sounds
aSelect Play sound
bSelect an item and press w (Save)
23-2
Tip
• The contents of Cookie options are:
Accept all: Always accept Cookies.
Reject all: Always reject Cookies.
Prompt: Confirm Cookies each time they appear.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings → Text size
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Activating/Deactivating Java
Script
Default
■
Off
Setting
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings → Java script
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
23
Other Web Settings
Text Size
Default
■
Normal
Setting
Change the size of the page fonts.
23-3
Manufacture Number
Default
■
Off
Setting
Set 708SC to automatically send handset serial
number to Websites upon request for user
identification.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings → Manufacture
number
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
23
Other Web Settings
Browser Information
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings → About browser
23-4
Certificates
View electronic certificate saved on 708SC.
AOpen a page using SSL/TLS
BSelect Options → Browser setting →
Certificates
CSelect Root certificate to view the
certificate
Refresh Browser
Empty Cache/Empty Cookies
Delete information saved in Cache and Cookies.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings
BDelete as required
To delete Cache contents
Select Empty cache → c (Yes)
To delete Cookies
Select Empty cookies → c (Yes)
23
Other Web Settings
23-5
23
Other Web Settings
23-6
S! Appli
Getting Started
S! Appli
Download 708SC-compatible S! Appli including
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
games, 3D images, and information via Mobile
BSelect Download S! Appli
Internet sites.
CSelect S! Appli to download
• Use only compatible S! Appli.
• To download S! Appli, separate subscription is
required and communication fees apply.
Network S! Appli
Some S! Appli require network connection. Enjoy
24
Downloading S! Appli
DSelect Yes
When details appear
Press c
ESelect Exit
network gaming or access real-time information like
To activate S! Appli
stock prices.
Select Launch
S! Appli
• A separate subscription is required to download
S! Appli or use those which require network
connection.
• Connection fees apply.
24-2
Starting S! Appli
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BSelect S! Appli and press c (Start)
Tip
• When S! Appli is active
appears.
Exit, Pause, & Resume
Exiting or Pausing S! Appli
APress y while a S! Appli is being
executed
BChoose to exit/pause
To exit S! Appli
Press w (Exit)
To pause S! Appli
Press c (Pause)
Tip
• When S! Appli is paused
708SC returns to Standby and
24
appears.
S! Appli
• When 708SC is closed while S! Appli is active
S! Appli is paused.
24-3
Restarting a Paused S! Appli
AIn Standby with S! Appli paused,
press c and select S! Appli
BPress w (Resume)
Lock/Unlock
Managing S! Appli
Lock S! Appli to prevent accidental deletion.
Details
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
Open Details to confirm S! Appli properties.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
24
Tip
• S! Appli properties
Open Details to see following properties:
Name, Description, Profiles, Certification, Size,
Record Size, Version, and Vendor.
S! Appli
BHighlight a S! Appli, select Options →
Details
BHighlight S! Appli, select Options →
Lock
Tip
• Locked S! Appli Indicator
In S! Appli list,
appears.
• To cancel lock
In Step 2, highlight locked S! Appli, select Options →
Unlock
24-4
Delete
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BDelete S! Appli
To delete one S! Appli
Select Options → Delete → Selected → Yes
To delete multiple S! Appli
aSelect Options → Delete → Multiple
Tip
• When all S! Appli are checked
In Step 2, perform a to c in "To delete multiple S!
Appli," press w (Delete) in d and proceed the
following procedures
a Enter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes
b Select Yes to delete all S! Appli or No to exclude
locked ones
• To select/deselect multiple S! Appli at once
a In Step 2, select Options → Delete → Multiple
b Select Options → Mark all or Unmark all
bCheck S! Appli to delete
cRepeat Step b to check all target S! Appli
mPet
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
With 708SC mPet, raise your own virtual pet. Train
To delete all S! Appli
or enjoy playing games with.
aSelect Options → Delete → All
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm)
exclude locked ones
S! Appli
and select Yes
cSelect Yes to delete all S! Appli or No to
24
Selecting Pet
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list → mPet → Yes
24-5
BUse s to select the pet and press
c (Select)
To select pet after checking action
Select Options → animate and press c
(Select)
To select pet after checking direction
Select Options → turn and press c (Select)
CEnter a name
DSelect Yes and press c
Tip
• After selecting your pet
Garden appears. Train or tame in this location. Play
game with in other rooms. Activating mPet shows the
location last used.
• Pet action in mPet window
After a while with no action to pet; pet starts to play
alone, bark, shows it's emotional text bubble. With low
battery, pet gets down and starts sniffing.
• To end mPet
Press C or y
• To set mPet as Wallpaper ( P.8-2)
• mPet Help
Use mPet Help to see other operations. In mPet
window, select Options → Help or press o while
Help appears
Emotion Indicator
24
S! Appli
mPet Window
24-6
Operation
mPet Operations
Window Operations
Locatio
In Options, set Navigation to Shortcut mode, then
press corresponding button to select operation; set
Navigation to Walking mode, then use a to move
pet to specified location and select operation.
Available operations in each location are listed
Garden
below.
Shortcut
mode
Walking
mode
(Window
area)
Description
Notes
Play the Ding
(Upper Left) Dong game.
Front Door
(Upper)
Move to Living
Room.
Flower Bed
(Upper
Right)
Go for a walk.
Ball
(Down
Right)
Play the Stanza
game.
Door
(Upper
Left)
Move to Garden.
Back Door
(Upper
Right)
Move to
Kitchen.
Living
Room
24
S! Appli
24-7
Operation
Locatio
Shortcut
mode
Walking
mode
(Window
area)
Operation
Description
Back Door
Move to Living
(Upper Left) Room.
Door
(Upper
Right)
Move to Bed
Room.
Kitchen 3
Bowl
(Down
Right)
Feed full meal.
24
S! Appli
Bed
Room
24-8
Locatio
Bed
Room
Shortcut
mode
Walking
mode
(Window
area)
Description
Dog House
(Upper
Right)
Pet sleeps.
Book
(Down
Right)
Play English
Quiz.
Injector
Cure pet.
(Down Left)
Today's
Display Today's
Saying
Saying.
(Down Left)
Action Operations
Snacks
(Upper)
operations listed below (Train/Commend/
Door
Move to Kitchen.
(Upper Left)
Laundry
Basket
(Upper)
Give snacks.
Bathe pet.
In mPet window, press w (Action) to perform the
Discipline). Pet growth varies by operations.
Item
Train
Commend
Discipline
Description
Sit
Teach pet to sit down.
Roll
Teach pet to roll over.
Turn
Teach pet to turn around.
Bark
Teach pet to bark.
Paw
Teach pet to give you a paw.
Praise
Praise pet for good behavior.
Pet
Cheer pet up.
Warn
Order pet not to do.
Punish
Punish pet for bad behavior.
Tip
• When pet refuse to act
Pet sometimes refuse to act as operated, due to such as
the first time operation, pet status. Teach pet repeatedly
or check the status and take care.
Item
Description
Location
Select a location from among
Garden/Living room/Kitchen/
Bedroom.
Pet Inventory
Show Pet list to select various
settings ( P.24-9).
Pet Status
Check Pet status while pet is
playing around.
Options
Select mPet sound/display settings
( P.24-10).
Help
Check mPet operations description.
Other Operations
Adopt a New Pet
Up to 5 pets can be adopted.
24
AIn mPet window, select Options → Pet
Inventory
BSelect Options → Adopt a new pet
24-9
S! Appli
• When each operation ends
Pet barks and responds to operation with emotional
state text bubble; pet status window appears. Check the
pet status by following category: Health/Fatigue/
Fullness/Clean/Stress/Obedient/Intimacy.
Options
CPerform Steps 2 and 3 in "Select Pet"
( P.24-5)
Pet Inventory
AIn mPet window, select Options → Pet
Inventory
AIn mPet window, select Options → Pet
Inventory
BHighlight the pet and select Options
→ Say Goodbye
BSelect a pet
CPress o (Yes)
Tip
• Pet status
In Step 2, select Options → View status
24
Say Goodbye
• Rename your pet
a In Step 2, highlight the pet
b Select Options → Rename
c Enter a name
S! Appli
24-10
DPress c
Note
• Note that once gave up your pet, unable to restore
it.
mPet Sound & Settings
Default
Setting
■
■
■
Sound: Sound only
Navigation: Shortcut mode
Sound type: Voice
AIn mPet window, select Options →
Options
BPerform operations to set
To set pet sound
aSelect Sound
bSelect an item and Press c
To set operation mode
Tip
• The contents of Sound are:
Sound & Vibrate: Pet barks and 708SC vibrates
simultaneously.
Sound only: Pet barks.
Vibrate: 708SC vibrates with no pet barking.
No sound: No vibration and with no pet barking.
• The contents of Navigation are:
Shortcut mode: Show available shortcuts indicators in
mPet window to use assigned shortcuts keys.
Walking mode: Use a to move locations with the
pet.
• The contents of Sound type are:
Voice: Indicate the selected action operation by voice.
Melody: Indicate the selected action operation by
melody.
aSelect Navigation
bSelect an item and Press c
To set action menu sound
Comic Surfing
24
bSelect an item and Press c
browsing electronic comic/photo book files (CCF
CPress c
files) saved in Book folder in Data Folder. Enlarge/
24-11
S! Appli
aSelect Sound type
"コミックサーフィン" is the file viewer for
reduce images, scroll the page easily, browse more
lively images with sound/vibration effects.
Security
To browse CCF files, acquire Content Key. No
Default
Content Key is required to browse the default sample
Setting
files in 708SC.
Browsing Electronic Comic
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! application list
→ コミックサーフィン
Tip
• After starting
Refer to ヘルプ in コミックサーフィン .
24
Net Access: Per session
Application Autoinvocation: Per session
Local connectivity: Per session
■ Read user data access: Per access
■ Write use data access: Per access
■
■
■
Set whether to allow S! Appli to automatically use
communication functions. Alternatively, set to
display a confirmation message when activating S!
Appli or using communications.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BHighlight S! Appli, select Options →
Permissions
S! Appli
CSelect items to set
24-12
Web accessing functions
Select Net Access
Automatic starting functions
Select Application Autoinvocation
Connection functions to external devices
Select Local connectivity
Read user data access function
Select Read user data access
Write user data access function
Select Write user data access
Tip
• The contents of Permissions are:
Setting for each item are as follows. Settings vary by
item.
Always: Always allow the use of the function.
Per session: After activating, S! Appli asks, for the
first use, whether to allow the use of the function.
Display this message only once.
Per access: Every time you use a function, display a
message for confirmation.
Never: Never allow the use of the function.
• To restore defaults
In Step 3, select Reset → Yes
DSelect items and press c (Save)
S! Appli Settings
Make S! Appli settings and restore defaults.
24
Backlight
■
S! Appli
Default
Normal settings
Setting
Set Display settings for the backlight.
24-13
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → Backlight
BSelect the setting and press c
Tip
• The contents of Backlight are:
Always On: Set the backlight always on.
Always Off: Set the backlight always off.
Normal settings: Settings of Backlight time ( P.8-8)
for Display settings take priority.
BUse a to adjust the volume and
press c
Tip
• Sound volume in Manner Profile
Sound volume follows the settings of the current
Manner Profile.
Vibration
Default
Application Volume
■
On
Setting
Set whether or not to active the vibration when using
Default
■
Level 3
Setting
24
Adjust the volume of sounds.
S! Appli
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → Application
Volume
24-14
S! Appli with vibrator.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → Vibration
BSelect an item and press c
S! Appli Sort
Default
■
By Date
Setting
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → S! Appli sort
BSelect an item and press c
Reset S! Appli Settings
Restore S! Appli settings to defaults.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → Reset S! Appli
settings
24
S! Appli
BEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
24-15
24
S! Appli
24-16
Appendix
Main Menu
Item
Functions
25
Appendix
Main Menu
Item
S! Appli
Yahoo! Keitai
Media Player
Camera
Item
Page
S! Application list
P.24-2
S! Appli Settings
P.24-13
Yahoo! Keitai
P.21-3
Bookmarks
P.22-10
Saved pages
P.22-9
Enter URL
P.21-4
History
P.22-12
Browser settings
P.23-2
Music
P.10-3
Video
P.10-9
Take photo
P.7-5
Record video
P.7-11
Go to photos
P.7-6
Go to videos
P.7-12
Dynamic effect list P.7-19
Video editor
25-2
P.7-17
Data Folder
Messaging
Item
Page
Pictures
P.11-2
Videos
P.11-2
Sounds &
Ringtones
P.11-2
S! Appli
P.11-2
Book
P.11-2
Other documents
P.11-2
Memory status
P.11-3
Received msgs
P.17-4, 18-2
Create msg
P.17-9
Drafts
P.18-8
Unsent msgs
P.18-9
Sent msgs
P.18-8
Templates
P.17-15
Server mail box
P.19-2
Settings
P.20-2, 20-5
Memory status
P.18-2
Main Menu
Item
Phonebook
Page
Main Menu
Item
Item
Page
Alarms
P.14-2
Phone settings
Calendar
P.14-5
Sound settings
P.9-4
Voice recorder
P.14-16
Display settings
P.8-1
World clock
P.14-19
Call settings
Calculator
P.14-21
Converter
P.14-21
Connectivity
P.12-1
Stopwatch
P.14-24
Security
P.13-1
Dictionary
P.14-24
Software Update
P.25-10
Photo slide
P.8-3
Memory settings
P.13-11, 15-9
Interpreter
P.14-25
Memory status
P.14-13
Phonebook List
P.5-9
Settings
25
Appendix
Tools
Item
Phonebook settings P.5-1
25-3
Troubleshooting
25
Appendix
■ 708SC does not turn on
" Is battery empty?
# Replace or charge battery.
" Is battery installed in 708SC?
# Install battery correctly.
■ When power is turned on, PIN entry
window appears
" Is PIN lock set to Enable?
# If PIN lock is Enable, enter PIN.
■ When power is turned on, USIM
password entry window appears
" Is USIM lock set to Enable?
# If USIM lock is Enable, enter USIM
password.
25-4
■ Please insert USIM card or This card
cannot be recognized appears when 708SC
is turned on or executing a function
" Is USIM Card correctly installed?
# Check to see if USIM Card is correctly
installed. If the message appears even
though USIM Card is correctly installed,
it may be damaged.
" Is an incorrect USIM Card used?
# Check to see if correct USIM Card is
used. Use USIM Card specified by
SoftBank.
" Are the IC contacts of USIM Card
contaminated with fingerprints, etc.?
# Wipe contamination off with a clean, dry
cloth, and install USIM Card correctly.
■ Reading USIM Cannot operate or Reading
USIM Card Cannot start appears
# USIM Card data is being read. Try again
■ A Busy tone continues after dialing
" Have you entered a phone number
beginning with zero such as an area code?
# Enter a phone number beginning with
zero such as an area code.
" Is 708SC set to Offline mode?
appears)
# Change 708SC to another mode such as
Normal.
or
appears and no calls can be
initiated
" 708SC is out-of-range.
25
Appendix
later.
■
# Move to a place where the signal is
stronger and try again.
■ Calls are interrupted or disconnected
" Does
or
appear?
# Move to a place where the signal is
stronger and try again.
" Is battery empty?
# Replace or charge battery.
■ Unable to initiate a call
" Is Call Barring set?
# Deactivate Call Barring.
25-5
25
■ Unable to open Phonebook entry, Data
Folder, Call Log, Calendar, or Messaging
" Is Privacy lock set?
Appendix
# Cancel Privacy lock.
■ Clicking noise is heard during a call
" Noise may be generated when the signal
is weak or while moving between
coverage areas.
■ Unable to charge battery
" Is AC Charger Connector securely
inserted into 708SC?
# Insert AC Charger Connector securely.
" Is AC Charger securely inserted into an
electric outlet?
# Insert AC Charger securely.
" Is battery installed in 708SC?
# Install battery correctly.
25-6
" Are the charging terminals of 708SC,
battery or the connector plug of AC
Charger clean?
# Clean the contacts with a dry cotton swab,
etc.
" Has battery been charged in places with
ambient temperature below 5 ºC or above
40 ºC.
# Charge battery in places with ambient
temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC.
" Battery may need to be replaced.
# Replace with a new battery.
" Does battery always lose its charge
quickly after being charged?
# Battery life has expired. Replace with a
new battery.
" Does 708SC or battery become very
warm during charging?
charging may stop. After 708SC and
battery are cool, retry charging.
■ Devices become hot
" During charging, AC Charger may
become hot.
" 708SC may become hot during charging
or a long call.
# If 708SC can be touched with your hand,
it is normal. If it is too hot to touch,
immediately stop charging and contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25).
the operating environment (Ambient
temperature, charging conditions, or
Signal Strength), operations, and settings.
# Use 708SC in an appropriate environment
and reduce operations requiring high
power ( P.1-14).
■ Display flickers
" Is 708SC used near a fluorescent light?
# Use 708SC as far away from a fluorescent
light as possible.
■ Display is dim or unlit
" This may be due to the characteristics of
Display and not a problem. The time
(seconds) until Display is dimmed or unlit
25-7
25
Appendix
# If the temperature rises too much,
■ Battery drains quickly
" Battery may drain quickly depending on
can be changed by adjusting the
Backlight time.
25
Appendix
■ Unable to play music through the speaker
" Is Manner Profile set?
# Cancel Manner Profile.
" Is the stereo earphone microphone
connected?
# Disconnect the connector for the stereo
earphone microphone from 708SC.
■ Too many applications are already running,
thus unable to launch anymore appears
" Memory is low or full.
■ Unable to establish Bluetooth® or USB
connections using Samsung PC Studio
" Is the USB driver installed? (for USB
connection)
# If communications are executed
connecting to a personal computer with
the supplied USB cable, installing the
driver is required. Install the driver from
the supplied CD-ROM.
" Is the connection method set correctly on
the personal computer?
# Set the connection method to USB or
Bluetooth on the Connection Manager of
# Delete unnecessary S! Mail messages. If
Samsung PC Studio or the Connection
multiple functions are active, close some
Wizard for the communication in use.
of them.
25-8
" Are the settings of Bluetooth® or the USB
connection port of the PC same as those
# Make sure port settings match those set
for Samsung PC Studio Connection
Manager or Connection Wizard.
■ Some Phonebook entries do not appear
" Is 708SC set to Hide in Secret Mode?
# Set to Show in Secret Mode.
■ Message cannot be created
" Shared Memory may be full.
# Delete unnecessary messages. If available
memory is less than 464 KB, messages
cannot be created.
■ Try again appears
" Signal conditions are poor.
■ Sending message failed or Unknown error
appears
" Network connection failed.
# Try again later.
■ All available connections are busy appears
" New S! Mail arrives while 708SC is
being used for packet data
communications.
# End the data communication and try
again.
■ Service unavailable appears
" 708SC is outside the service area.
# Send from within the service area.
■ No response appears
" Network/Server is busy.
25-9
25
Appendix
for Samsung PC Studio?
# Move for a stronger signal and try again.
# Try again later.
25
Appendix
■ Change from flight profile to other profile
for network service, created message will be
saved in outbox appears
" Offline mode is active.
# Cancel Offline mode and try again.
■ Cannot download because of too large data
appears
" S! Appli memory is full.
# Delete unnecessary S! Appli and try
again.
■ Received invalid data. Quit download or
Cannot download because of too large data
appears
# File cannot be downloaded; cancel
download.
25-10
Software Update
Check for 708SC software updates and download as
update.
To update immediately
Select Update now to start the update. When
completed, 708SC turns the power off and on
again; then Notification window appears.
APress c and select Settings →
Software update
BPress w (Yes)
708SC connects to network.
CRead Terms of Use and select Agree
Read through Terms of Use before selecting
Agree.
DEnter Center Access Code ( P.1-26)
and press c
Update Result appears.
Notification Window
To schedule later update
aSelect Schedule update
bPress c (Yes)
cPress w (Yes)
dSelect schedule date and press c
eSelect schedule time and press c
fConfirm schedule date & time and press c
25-11
25
Appendix
required. Choose to begin Update or Schedule
EPress c
Tip
25
Appendix
• Operation procedures
Procedures can be found in the SoftBank Website
(http://www.softbank.jp).
• Connection fees
Connection fees do not apply to updates (including
checking for updates, downloading, and rewriting).
• Scheduled update time comes
Confirmation window appears at scheduled update
time. Press c or wait approximately ten seconds to
start. Update will not start while 708SC is in use. When
the current operation ends, confirmation window
appears. But other functions active, and ten minutes
after scheduled update time, scheduled update is
automatically canceled.
Notification Window
• To cancel Schedule update
a Perform Steps 1 to 5, select Cancel schedule
b Press w (Yes)
25-12
Note
• Charge battery beforehand; a low battery may
cause update to fail.
25
Symbols
Appendix
• When Scheduled update time comes and 708SC is
out-of-range, Software Update does not start.
Symbols & Pictograms
Double-byte Symbols
• Keep 708SC in a place where signal is strong and
stable.
• 708SC Phonebook entries, media files, and other
contents are not affected by software updates, but
always back-up important information (note that
some files cannot be copied). SoftBank is not liable
for damages from lost information, etc.
䄟
• During update, calling or receiving messages, etc.
cannot be used.
• Update may take for a while.
• Update failure may disable 708SC. Contact
SoftBank Customer Center, Customer Assistance.
25-13
Single-byte Symbols
25
Appendix
Symbol Conversions
Symbol
Label
Symbol
Symbol
Label
Symbol
あっと
＠@
こめ
※
いこーる
＝=
ころん
：；
えん
￥
さんかく
△▲▽▼
おんぷ
♪
しかく
□■◇◆
×
どう
かける
かっこ
から
25-14
()「」『』【】〈〉 ぱーせんと
“ ”
（）
〔 〕 ほし
[]‘ ’
［ ］｛ ｝〈 〉《 》
まる
∼
やじるし
ゝ〃々
%%
☆★
○●◎
→←↑↓
Pictograms
25
Appendix
• Pictograms with
are animated.
25-15
• Some pictograms and animated pictograms may not appear properly on some models of SoftBank handsets or other
devices.
25
Appendix
25-16
Memory List
Specifications
Up to 500 messages
notice.
Drafts
Up to 10 messages
Unsent msgs
Up to 10 messages
SoftBank 708SC
Sent msgs
Up to 250 messages
Received msgs
Up to 500 messages
Received msgs
S! Mail
SMS
Drafts
Up to 10 messages
Unsent msgs
Up to 10 messages
Sent msgs
Up to 250 messages
Pictures
Item
Data Folder
Sounds &
Ringtones
S! Appli
Book
Other documents
Up to 999 items
(files and
subfolders) per
folder
Specification
Weight
Approximately 97 g
Continuous Talk
Time
Voice Call:
Approximately 165 minutes (3G)
Approximately 310 minutes
(GSM)
Video Call:
Approximately 100 minutes (3G)
Videos
25
Appendix
Shared Memory
708SC specifications may change without prior
Continuous Standby
Time (708SC closed Approximately 255 hours (3G)
Approximately 300 hours (GSM)
and sub Display
OFF)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approximately 51.4 x 102.5 x
11.9 ㎜ (708SC closed)
Maximum Output
0.25 W
• 708SC with battery installed.
25-17
25
Appendix
• Battery Time is calculated by SoftBank under
stable signal conditions. Calling in poor signal
conditions or leaving 708SC on out-of-range will
consume more power and may reduce Battery
Time by more than half.
• Frequent 708SC operations requiring Backlight
(e.g., Yahoo! Keitai) may reduce Continuous Talk
Time and Continuous Standby Time.
• Using video for Wallpaper may significantly
reduce Continuous Talking and Continuous
Standby Times.
• Using S! Appli may reduce Continuous Talking
and Continuous Standby Times.
• Continuous Talk Time is an average measured with
a new, fully charged battery in stable signal
conditions. Continuous Standby Time is an
average measured with a new, fully charged battery
with 708SC closed without calls or operations, in
Standby, in stable signal conditions. Alternating
between usage and Standby shortens Continuous
Talk Time and Continuous Standby Time. Talk
Time/Standby Time may vary by environment
(battery status, ambient temperature, etc.).
25-18
Battery
Item
Specification
Voltage
3.7 V
Type
Lithium-ion
Capacity
880 mAh
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approximately 46.3 x 36.9 x 5.2
mm
(without protruding parts)
AC Charger
Item
Specification
Power Source
AC 100 V-240 V, 50/60 Hz
(with power cable)
Output Voltage/
Current
DC 5 V/720 mA
Charging
Temperature
5 to 40 ºC
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approximately 53 x 49 x 20 mm
(without cables)
Cord Length
Approximately 180 cm
INDEX
AC Charger .............................................1-14
Acoustic shock ........................................15-5
Activate Secret mode .........................13-6
Activating Bluetooth® .......................12-4
Activating S! Appli ..............................24-3
Active Folder ...........................................15-6
Add to playlist ........................................10-5
Adding Reject Black List ................13-9
Adjusting earpiece volume ...............2-7
Adjusting ringtone volume ...... 2-3, 6-3
Adjusting volume level to play
.......................................................... 10-7, 10-12
Alarms .........................................................14-2
All music ....................................................10-3
Anniversary .............................................14-9
Answer Machine .....................................2-5
Answering mode ...................................12-9
Anykey answer ......................................15-5
...................................................................... 12-2
Attaching files ...................................... 18-13
Attaching to a message for sending
still images ........................................... 7-20
Attaching to a message for sending
videos ............................................7-20, 11-13
Attaching/Inserting a file .............. 17-15
Audio Skin ............................................... 10-7
Auto power ON ..................................... 14-4
Auto redial ............................................... 15-2
Backlight ................................ 8-7, 10-8, 24-13
Battery ...............................................1-10, 1-12
Bluetooth® ................................................ 12-2
Bluetooth® Address ........................... 12-3
Bluetooth® service .............................. 12-3
Browser Information ........................ 23-3
Cache ........................................................... 21-2
Calculator ............................................... 14-19
Calendar ....................................................14-5
Calendar window format ................14-6
Call answer mode ..................................9-3
Call cost limit ..........................................2-12
Call Log Records ....................................2-9
Call Transfer service .........................16-3
Call Waiting ............................................16-8
Caller ID ..................................................16-13
Camera .........................................................7-2
Camera mode ...........................................7-4
Camera setting .......................................7-13
Capturing continuous images ........7-8
Capturing in Mosaic shot .................7-9
Capturing mode ......................................7-4
Capturing still images .........................7-5
Capturing videos ..................................7-10
Category ......................................................5-7
Centre access code ...............................1-23
Certificates ................................... 22-16, 23-4
Changing a file name .......................11-15
Changing a folder name .... 11-15, 18-15
Changing mail address .....................20-2
Changing phone password .............13-2
25-17
25
Appendix
Applicable Profiles for Bluetooth®
25
Appendix
Changing PIN .........................................13-2
Changing PIN2 ......................................13-2
Changing profile .....................................3-3
Changing settings of each profile
........................................................................9-2
Changing to SMS ...............................17-12
Changing to S! mail ..........................17-12
Changing voice recorder settings
....................................................................14-17
Charger Port .............................................1-7
Charging .......................................... 1-14, 1-16
Checking memory usage ....... 15-8, 18-2
Clear memory .......................................13-10
Clock Display ............................................8-4
Conference Call .....................................16-9
Connecting a Bluetooth®compatible device ................... 12-6, 12-9
Connection to another Bluetooth
devices .....................................................12-6
Content key info ..................................11-14
Converting currency or unit .......14-19
Cookie setting .........................................23-2
Copy text ..................................................22-13
25-18
Copying characters ............................ 4-13
Copying files ......................................... 11-16
Copying folders ................................... 11-16
Copying items ........................................ 5-14
Copying Phonebook ........................... 5-15
Copyrighted file icons ....................... 18-5
Country code .......................................... 15-3
Creating a folder .....................11-15, 18-15
Creating a play list ............................. 10-6
Creating messages ............................... 17-6
Current contacts .................................... 2-9
Cutting characters .............................. 4-13
Data folder ......................................7-15, 11-2
Date and time setting ........................ 1-18
Default name ........................................ 14-17
Default style ............................................ 20-4
Deleting a bookmark ....................... 22-11
Deleting a file ........................................ 11-17
Deleting a folder ......................11-17, 18-16
Deleting a Saved page ....................... 22-9
Deleting a S! Appli .............................. 24-5
Deleting access logs ...........................22-11
Deleting Cache .......................................23-4
Deleting Calendar items ................14-13
Deleting Call Log Records .............2-10
Deleting characters .............................4-12
Deleting Cookies ...................................23-4
Deleting messages ................................18-9
Deleting messages in server ...........19-3
Deleting My devices ............................12-5
Deleting Phonebook ............................5-15
Deleting still images ..............................7-6
Deleting templates ..........4-17, 18-9, 18-11
Dialed Call Log Records ...................2-9
Dialing display .........................................8-8
Dictionary ...............................................14-22
Display ..........................................................1-8
Display brightness .................................8-7
Display mode ..........................................14-7
Display Operator name ......................8-5
Display rendering ..............................22-12
Display size of videos .......................10-12
Displaying Slide show ......................17-12
Download Content Key ..................11-14
E
Earphone call ..........................................15-3
Editing bookmarks ...........................22-10
Editing Calendar details ................14-12
Editing Phonebook ..............................5-14
Editing still images ..............................7-15
Editing Style ..........................................17-13
Editing the title for a Saved page
......................................................................22-8
Editing Videos ........................................7-17
Effect sound and keypad tone
volume .......................................................9-2
Effect sound setting ...................... 9-3, 9-7
Effects ..........................................................7-12
Encode .......................................................22-15
Entering a number to select an item
......................................................................1-21
Entering by quoting text ..................4-11
Entering characters ......................4-2, 4-5
Entering emoticons ............................. 4-10
Entering pictograms .......................... 4-10
Entering symbols ................................. 4-10
Entering URL ........................................ 21-3
Entry mode for characters .............. 4-2
Event list .................................................. 14-12
External Device Port ........................... 1-7
File details .............................................. 11-14
File Viewer ............................................... 11-5
Font size .............................4-15, 8-6, 8-9, 23-3
Forwarding .............................................. 18-8
Forwarding Messages ....................... 19-4
Forwarding messages in server .. 19-4
Frames .................................................7-6, 7-16
Greeting Messages
................................ 8-9
Holiday .......................................................14-9
Home zone ................................................1-20
Icons for attached files ....................17-16
Icons for files ................................. 11-2, 11-4
Icons on Drafts list ..............................18-4
Icons on My devices list ...................12-6
Icons on Received messages list
......................................................................18-4
Icons on Sent messages .....................18-5
Icons on Unsent messages list .......18-5
Image display ..........................................23-2
In-car charger ........................................1-16
Initiating a call ............................... 2-2, 2-14
Initiating a call overseas ..................2-14
Initiating a Video Call ........................6-2
Initiating an international call
.............................................................. 2-2, 2-14
Inserting/Removing USIM Card .1-3
Installing and removing battery .1-12
25-19
25
Appendix
Downloading a S! Appli ...................24-2
Drafts ...........................................................18-2
DTMF .................................................... 2-8, 6-5
Dynamic effect list ...............................7-19
25
Appendix
International code ................................15-2
International roaming .......................2-13
Interpreter ..............................................14-23
Invoking a function with Switch Bar
......................................................................1-22
Invoking functions from Main menu
......................................................................1-20
Items to save to Phonebook
.............5-2
Java Script ................................................23-3
Jump .............................................................4-14
Key assignments .....................................4-3
Keypad tone ...............................................9-3
Language ...................................................8-10
List Font Size ............................................8-6
Locking/unlocking .............................11-14
Locking/unlocking files ..................11-14
25-20
Locking/Unlocking sound files .. 14-17
Locking/Unlocking S! Appli ......... 24-4
Mail art function .................................. 17-7
Mail Server .............................................. 19-2
Mailbox ...................................................... 18-2
Main menu style ..................................... 8-5
Manner profile ........................................ 3-2
Mark default number ....................... 5-14
Maximum of message size .............. 20-4
Media Player .......................................... 10-2
Memo ......................................................... 14-10
Message ...................................................... 17-2
Message details ...................................... 18-3
Message List ........................................... 19-2
Message type icon ................................ 18-3
Missed Call .........................................2-4, 2-9
Mobile Postcard ..................................... 7-7
Mobile tracker ....................................... 13-7
Modifying characters ........................ 4-12
Move to USIM ..................................... 18-20
mPet ............................................................. 24-5
mPostcard ...................................................7-6
Multi Selector ........................................... xiv
Mute ................................................2-3, 2-8, 9-4
My devices .............................12-4, 12-8, 12-9
My phone’s name ...............................12-11
My phone’s visibility ........................12-10
My phone’s visibility for Bluetooth®
....................................................................12-10
Network mode ........................................2-13
Network password ................... 1-24, 16-13
Network Profile .....................................2-13
Network selection .................................2-13
Network S! Appli .................................24-2
Offline Profile ...........................................3-2
Opening Saved page ...........................22-8
Operating messages in server ......19-2
Operations available during a Video
Call ..............................................................6-3
Operations during a call ....................2-8
P
Page Details ............................................22-14
Page Window ..........................................21-4
Password Lock .......................................13-5
Pasting characters ...............................4-13
Phone lock .................................................13-5
Phonebook search ..................................5-9
Photo slide ...................................................8-2
PIN ..................................................................1-5
PIN authentication at power on
.............................................................. 1-5, 13-3
PIN lock ......................................................13-3
PIN2 ................................................................1-5
PIN2 lock unlocking code ...............13-3
Player settings ............................ 10-7, 10-11
Playing melody ......................................10-3
Playing video ................................. 7-15, 10-9
Playing voice .........................................14-16
Popup menu .............................................. 8-6
Power ON/OFF ............................1-17, 1-18
Predictive entry function ON/OFF
...................................................................... 4-14
Preferences .............................................. 23-2
Preferred network .............................. 2-14
Pre-installed ............................................ 11-2
Print via Bluetooth® .......................... 12-7
Privacy Lock ........................................... 13-6
Providing Manufacturer Number
...................................................................... 23-3
PUK Code ..........................................1-5, 13-3
Putting a call on hold .......................... 2-7
Quoting for entries
............................. 4-11
Received call log ..................................... 2-9
Received messages .............................. 18-2
Receiving a call ....................................... 2-3
Receiving a Video Call ....................... 6-2
Receiving all messages ...................... 19-2
Receiving data via Bluetooth® .....12-7
Receiving message in server ..........19-2
Receiving settings .................................20-3
Record settings ....................................14-17
Recording voice ...................................14-16
Registering an S! Mail Template
....................................................................18-19
Registering as S! Mail Template
......................................................................18-6
Registering SMS templates ............4-16
Registering to bookmark ................22-9
Registering to Phonebook .................5-4
Rejecting call reception ....................15-6
Rejecting incoming calls ..................13-8
Renaming a still image file ...............7-6
Renaming My devices .......................12-5
Renaming sound files ......................14-17
Repeat mode ................................ 10-7, 10-11
Reply .................................................. 17-5, 18-7
Reply with text .......................................20-6
Reset ...........................................................13-11
Reset all ....................................................13-11
Reset settings ........................................13-11
25-21
25
Appendix
Option menu ...........................................1-23
Outgoing/incoming call barring
service ....................................................16-11
Owner information .............................5-16
25
Appendix
Resetting a call cost .............................2-11
Resetting Call times ............................2-11
Resetting PIN lock ...............................13-3
Resetting S! Appli settings ...........24-14
Restarting paused S! Appli ............24-4
Retry function ........................................17-2
Retry with ...................................................6-6
Ringtone for a Voice Call ..................5-8
Saving a page ..........................................22-8
Saving as a template .........................17-20
Saving attached files .........................18-14
Saving images .........................................22-2
Saving sounds .........................................22-5
Saving to Drafts ..................................17-20
Schedule .....................................................14-7
Search text ..............................................22-13
Search type ...............................................5-12
Secure mode for data transfer ...12-11
Security .....................................................24-12
Security Codes .......................................1-23
Selecting 3G or GSM .........................2-13
25-22
Sending a bookmark URL ........... 22-10
Sending a message from Drafts .. 18-8
Sending data via Bluetooth® ........ 12-6
Sending from Unsent Messages .. 18-9
Sending settings ............... 17-12, 20-2, 20-5
Sending sound files ........................... 14-16
Sending still images via Bluetooth®
...................................................................... 12-6
Sending URL ........................................ 22-14
Sending videos via Bluetooth®
.............................................................7-12, 12-6
Sending your image .............................. 6-5
Sent messages ......................................... 18-2
Server Certification ......................... 22-14
Server Mail Size ................................... 19-2
Shortcut operations ............................ 7-10
Shortcuts ..........................................1-22, 15-7
Side Key ..................................................... 15-6
Side Key Lock ........................................ 15-6
Simple Search Setting ....................... 15-7
Skin ............................................................... 10-8
Slide show ................................................. 11-3
SMS .....................................................17-2, 20-5
SMS templates .......................................4-11
Softkey .......................................................... xiii
Software Update .................................25-10
Sort .........................................11-9, 14-13, 18-17
Sorting files ..............................................11-9
Sound file details ................................14-17
Sound file setting ................................14-16
Sound playback .....................................23-2
Sound Settings .........................................9-4
Speaker Phone call ................................2-7
Speed dialing ...........................................5-12
SSL/TLS ....................................................21-2
SSL/TLS certificate ............................23-4
Still image details ...................................7-6
Stopping or Pausing S! Appli .......24-3
Stopwatch ...............................................14-22
Streaming ..................................................22-7
Sub LCD Light ........................................8-8
Substitute images ...................................6-6
SVG-T/Flash® Viewer ......................11-8
Switching callers .................................16-10
S! Appli .......................................................24-2
S! Appli detailed information ......24-4
S! Mail .........................................................17-2
S! Mail templates ................................17-14
Task ............................................................14-10
Templates ........................................ 4-11, 18-2
Timer ...........................................................7-11
Unsent messages ...................................18-2
Updating information ......................22-13
Updating mail list .................................19-2
USB connection ...................................12-11
User dictionary ......................................4-15
USIM Card ................................................1-2
USIM lock .................................................13-4
USIM password .....................................13-5
Using a file ..............................................11-10
Using a template .................................17-14
Using SMS templates .........................4-16
Wake-up Alarm ....................................14-2
Wallpaper ...................................................8-2
Web ...............................................................21-2
Web access from a bookmark ....22-10
Web connection from access logs
.................................................................... 14-12
Viewing your phone number (My
Phonebook details) ......................... 5-16
Visualization ........................................... 10-8
Voice Mail Service .............................. 16-5
Voice Recorder .................................... 14-15
Volume ...................................... 2-7, 9-2, 24-13
....................................................................22-11
World clock
...........................................14-18
Yahoo! Keitai ........................................22-16
Zoom list ......................................................8-7
Numerics
3D Pictogram ..........................................20-5
25-23
25
Appendix
Various settings for Video Call ..... 6-5
vFile ............................................................ 11-12
Vibration ........................................14-2, 24-14
Vibrator/Sound settings .................... 9-2
Video Mode ............................................. 7-10
Video settings ......................................... 7-14
Viewfinder .................................................. 7-3
Viewing a file .......................................... 11-3
Viewing attached files ..................... 18-13
Viewing Call cost ................................. 2-11
Viewing Call Log Records ............... 2-9
Viewing Call times .............................. 2-11
Viewing Saved Calendar Entries
25
Warranty & After Sales
Service
Appendix
Warranty
The purchased 708SC comes with a Warranty.
• Check the shop and date of purchase.
• Read through the contents of the Warranty and
keep it in a safe place.
• The warranty period can be found in the Warranty.
SoftBank is not liable for damages to you or a third
party from missed calls, etc. due to handset failure or
malfunction, etc.
Repair Requests
Before submitting 708SC for repair, consult the
"Troubleshooting" section.
for a solution. If a problem persists, contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25) or the nearest
25-24
SoftBank shop; be prepared to describe problem in
detail.
• During the warranty period, repairs will be made
under the terms and conditions described in the
warranty.
• After the warranty period, repairs will be upon
request; if said repairs can be made, you will be
charged for them.
Note
• 708SC files and settings may be lost or altered due
to accidents or repairs. Keep a copy of important
files, etc. like Phonebook entries. SoftBank is not
liable for damages resulting from accidental loss or
alteration of 708SC files (Phonebook, Data Folder,
etc.) or settings.
• Disassembling or modifying this product may be a
violation of the Radio Law. Note that SoftBank will
not accept repair requests for disassembled or
modified products.
Customer Service
25
If you have questions about SoftBank handsets or services, please call General Information.
Appendix
For repairs, please call Customer Assistance.
SoftBank Customer Center
SoftBank International Call Center
From a SoftBank handset, dial toll free at
157 for General Information or
113 for Customer Assistance
From outside Japan, dial +81-3-5351-3491
(Please take care to dial correctly; international charges
will apply.)
Call these numbers toll free from landlines.
Subscription Areas
Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi, Fukushima,
Niigata, Tokyo, Kanagawa, Chiba, Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi,
Gunma, Yamanashi, Nagano, Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui
Contact
General Information
0088-240-157 (Tollfree)
Customer Assistance
0088-240-113 (Tollfree)
General Information
0088-241-157 (Tollfree)
Customer Assistance
0088-241-113 (Tollfree)
Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka
25-25
Subscription Areas
Contact
General Information
0088-242-157 (Tollfree)
Customer Assistance
0088-242-113 (Tollfree)
General Information
0088-250-157 (Tollfree)
Customer Assistance
0088-250-113 (Tollfree)
Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama
Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane, Tokushima,
Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi, Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita,
Kumamoto, Miyazaki, Kagoshima, Okinawa
25-26
SoftBank 708SC
User
October 2006 Version 1
SOFTBANK MOBILE
Corp.
To help protect the environment and
recycle valuable resources, mobile
phone, and PHS shops displaying the
above mark accept mobile phones,
batteries, and chargers of all
manufacturers.
*Mobile phones, batteries, and chargers
collected for recycling cannot be
returned.
*To protect your privacy, delete any
personal information (telephone
*For more information, please
visit your nearest SoftBank
Model name : SoftBank 708SC
Manufacturer :Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd.

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Print high-res
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Modify Date                     : 2006:12:22 12:36:40-05:00
Create Date                     : 2006:12:22 11:54:54-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:12:22 12:36:40-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:d24bfab1-bc9d-43a5-bbf8-8e8c812a1563
Instance ID                     : uuid:537fe7cc-7c8a-4cff-a496-49e8004fdbef
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 6.0
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 441
Creator                         : PScript5.dll Version 5.2

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools